Toshiba G7 Operation Manual 51546 009 BOOK

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-G7-Operation-Manual-130828 toshiba-g7-operation-manual-130828 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 221 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

G7 Adjustable Speed Drive
Operation Manual
Document Number: 51546-009
Date: March, 2005
Introduction
Congratulations on the purchase of the new G7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive (ASD).
The G7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive is a solid-state AC drive that features True
Torque Control2. TIC’s Vector Control Algorithm enables the motor to develop high starting torque and
provide compensation for motor slip, which results in smooth, quick starts and highly efficient operation.
The G7 uses digitally-controlled pulse width modulation. The programmable functions may be accessed
via the easy-to-use menu or via the Direct Access Numbers (see page 59). This feature, combined with
Toshiba’s high-performance software, delivers unparalleled motor control and reliability.
The G7 is a very powerful tool, yet surprisingly simple to operate. The user-friendly Electronic Operator
Interface (EOI) of the G7 has an easy-to-read 240 x 64 pixel graphical LCD screen. The EOI provides
easy access to the many monitoring and programming features of the G7.
The motor control software is menu-driven, which allows for easy access to the motor control parameters
and quick changes when required.
To maximize the abilities of your new G7, a working familiarity with this manual will be required. This
manual has been prepared for the G7 ASD installer, user, and maintenance personnel. This manual may
also be used as a reference guide or for training. With this in mind, use this manual to develop a system
familiarity before attempting to install or operate the device.
Important Notice
The instructions contained in this manual are not intended to cover all details or variations in equipment
types, nor may it provide for every possible contingency concerning the installation, operation, or
maintenance of this equipment. Should additional information be required contact your Toshiba
representative.
The contents of this manual shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement,
commitment, or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Toshiba International
Corporation. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Toshiba
International Corporation and any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the
existing warranty.
Any electrical or mechanical modifications to this equipment without prior written consent of
Toshiba International Corporation will void all warranties and may void the UL/CUL listing or
other safety certifications. Unauthorized modifications may also result in a safety hazard or
equipment damage.
Misuse of this equipment could result in injury and equipment damage. In no event will Toshiba
Corporation be responsible or liable for direct, indirect, special, or consequential damage or injury
that may result from the misuse of this equipment.
Contacting Toshiba’s Customer Support
Center
Toshiba’s Customer Support Center can be contacted to obtain help in resolving any Adjustable Speed
Drive system problem that you may experience or to provide application information.
The center is open from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. (CST), Monday through Friday. The Support Center’s toll free
number is US (800) 231-1412/Fax (713) 466-8773 — Canada (800) 527-1204.
You may also contact Toshiba by writing to:
Toshiba International Corporation
13131 West Little York Road
Houston, Texas 77041-9990
Attn: ASD Product Manager.
For further information on Toshiba’s products and services, please visit our website at
www.tic.toshiba.com (right click and select Open Weblink in Browser).
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
G7 Adjustable Speed Drive
Please complete the Warranty Card supplied with the ASD and return it to Toshiba by prepaid mail. This will
activate the 12 month warranty from the date of installation; but, shall not exceed 18 months from the shipping
date.
Complete the following information and retain for your records.
Model Number: ______________________________________________________________________
Serial Number:______________________________________________________________________
Project Number (if applicable):__________________________________________________________
Date of Installation: __________________________________________________________________
Inspected By:______________________________________________________________________
Name of Application:_________________________________________________________________
About This Manual
This manual was written by the Toshiba Technical Publications Group. This group is tasked with
providing technical documentation for the G7 Adjustable Speed Drive. Every effort has been made to
provide accurate and concise information to you, our customer.
At Toshiba we’re continuously searching for better ways to meet the constantly changing needs of our
customers. Email your comments, questions, or concerns about this publication to
Technical-Publications-Dept@TIC.TOSHIBA.COM.
Manual’s Purpose and Scope
This manual provides information on how to safely install, operate, maintain, and dispose of your
G7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive. The information provided in this manual is
applicable to the G7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive only.
This operation manual provides information on the various features and functions of this powerful cost-
saving device, including
• Installation,
• System operation,
• Configuration and menu options, and
• Mechanical and electrical specifications.
Included is a section on general safety instructions that describe the warning labels and symbols that are
used throughout the manual. Read the manual completely before installing, operating, performing
maintenance, or disposing of this equipment.
This manual and the accompanying drawings should be considered a permanent part of the equipment
and should be readily available for reference and review. Dimensions shown in the manual are in metric
and/or the English equivalent.
Because of our commitment to continuous improvement, Toshiba International Corporation reserves the
right, without prior notice, to update information, make product changes, or to discontinue any product
or service identified in this publication.
Toshiba International Corporation (TIC) shall not be liable for direct, indirect, special, or
consequential damages resulting from the use of the information contained within this manual.
TOSHIBA is a registered trademark of the Toshiba Corporation. All other product or trade references
appearing in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective owners.
This manual is copyrighted. No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced in any form
without the prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation.
© Copyright 2005 Toshiba International Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Table of Contents
G7 ASD Operation Manual i
CE Compliance Requirements ............................................................................................. 10
EMC Installation Guidelines ............................................................................................ 10
Motor Characteristics ........................................................................................................... 13
Motor Autotuning ............................................................................................................. 13
Pulse Width Modulation Operation .................................................................................. 13
Low Speed Operation ....................................................................................................... 13
Overload Protection Adjustment ...................................................................................... 13
Operation Above 60 Hz .................................................................................................... 14
Power Factor Correction .................................................................................................. 14
Light Load Conditions ..................................................................................................... 14
Motor/Load Combinations ............................................................................................... 14
Load-produced Negative Torque ...................................................................................... 15
Motor Braking ..................................................................................................................15
ASD Characteristics .............................................................................................................. 16
Over-current Protection .................................................................................................... 16
ASD Capacity ...................................................................................................................16
Using Vector Control ........................................................................................................ 16
Local/Remote Operation .................................................................................................. 16
Installation and Connections ................................................................................................ 17
Installation Notes .............................................................................................................. 17
Mounting the ASD ........................................................................................................... 18
Connecting the ASD ......................................................................................................... 19
I/O and Control ................................................................................................................. 22
G7 ASD Control ............................................................................................................... 26
Typical Connection Diagram ...........................................................................................30
Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control ................................................................. 31
Command Control (F003) ................................................................................................ 31
Frequency Control (F004) ................................................................................................ 32
Override Operation ........................................................................................................... 34
Electronic Operator Interface .............................................................................................. 36
EOI Features ..................................................................................................................... 36
EOI Operation ..................................................................................................................37
System Operation .................................................................................................................. 38
Initial Setup ...................................................................................................................... 38
Operation (Local) ............................................................................................................. 38
Default Setting Changes ................................................................................................... 39
Startup Wizard Requirements ............................................................................................. 40
System Configuration and Menu Options ........................................................................... 43
Root Menus ...................................................................................................................... 43
Direct Access Parameter Information ................................................................................. 59
Direct Access Parameters/Numbers ................................................................................. 59
ii G7 ASD Operation Manual
Alarms, Trips, and Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 173
Alarms and Trips ............................................................................................................ 173
Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 174
User Notification Codes ................................................................................................. 176
Trips/Faults ..................................................................................................................... 176
Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information ................................................... 182
Enclosure Dimensions/Weight ....................................................................................... 182
Conduit Plate Information .............................................................................................. 187
Conduit Extender Box (option) ...................................................................................... 189
EOI Remote Mounting ........................................................................................................ 190
Current/Voltage Specifications ........................................................................................... 193
Cable/Terminal Specifications ............................................................................................ 195
Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable Specifications .................................................. 198
Link Reactor Information .................................................................................................. 199
G7 Optional Devices ............................................................................................................ 200
G7 ASD Spare Parts Listing ............................................................................................... 201
G7 ASD Operation Manual 1
General Safety Information
DO NOT attempt to install, operate, maintain or dispose of this equipment until you have read and
understood all of the product safety information and directions that are contained in this manual.
Safety Alert Symbol
The Safety Alert Symbol indicates that a potential personal injury hazard exists. The symbol is
comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an exclamation mark.
Signal Words
Listed below are the signal words that are used throughout this manual followed by their descriptions
and associated symbols. When the words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION are used in this
manual they will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully adhered to.
The word DANGER preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that an imminently hazardous
situation exists that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury to personnel.
The word WARNING preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous
situation exists that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury to personnel.
The word CAUTION preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous
situation exists which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
The word CAUTION without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation exists
which, if not avoided, may result in equipment and property damage.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
2G7 ASD Operation Manual
Special Symbols
To identify special hazards, other symbols may appear in conjunction with the DANGER, WARNING
and CAUTION signal words. These symbols indicate areas that require special and/or strict adherence
to the procedures to prevent serious injury to personnel or death.
Electrical Hazard Symbol
A symbol which indicates a hazard of injury from electrical
shock or burn. It is comprised of an equilateral triangle
enclosing a lightning bolt.
Explosion Hazard Symbol
A symbol which indicates a hazard of injury from exploding
parts. It is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an
explosion image.
Equipment Warning Labels
DO NOT attempt to install, operate, perform maintenance, or dispose of this equipment until you have
read and understood all of the product labels and user directions that are contained in this manual.
Shown below are examples of safety labels that may be found attached to the equipment. DO NOT
remove or cover any of the labels. If the labels are damaged or if additional labels are required, contact
your Toshiba sales representative for additional labels.
Labels attached to the equipment are there to provide useful information or to indicate an imminently
hazardous situation that may result in serious injury, severe property and equipment damage, or death if
the instructions are not followed.
Figure 1. Examples of labels that may be found on the equipment.
CAUTION
Excessive Loading of Operating Shaft
Can Prevent Contactor From Closing
Properly Resulting In Major Damage.
Do Not Use Contactor Shaft To Drive
Accessories Such As Mechanical Interlocks
Which Require More Than 5 Kgf-cm Of
Torque To Operate.
!DANGER
DO NOT OPEN THIS DOOR WHILE THE UNIT IS RUNNING.
THIS DOOR IS INTERLOCKED WITH ASD OPERATION.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT.
Capacitors Are Charged. Wait
At Least 5 Minutes Before Entry.
Check For Charged Voltage
To Dissipate To A Safe Level
Before Opening The Equipment.
!
DANGER
DO NOT REMOVE, DESTROY, OR COVER THIS LABEL.
READ THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY BEFORE
INSTALLING, OPERATING, OR SERVICING THIS EQUIPMENT.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
Can Cause Severe Injury, Death, Explosion,
Fire, Or Property Damage.
Only Qualified Personnel Should Be Permitted
To Operarate or Service This Equipment.
Disconnect And Lockout Primary And Control
Circuit Power Before Servicing.
Keep All Panels And Covers Securely In Place.
Never Defeat, Modify, Or Bypass Safety
Interlocks.
Foreign Voltage May Be Present At Interface
Terminals. Isolate Before Performing Service
Or Repairs.
Unauthorized Modifications To This Equipment
Will Void The Warranty.
!
DANGER
DO NOT REMOVE, DESTROY, OR COVER THIS LABEL.
READ THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY BEFORE
ENTERING THIS COMPARTMENT.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE Behind These Panels.
Contact With Energized Main Bus Will Cause
Severe Injury, Death, Fire, Explosion, Or
Property Damage.
Turn Off And Lockout Primary And
Control Circuit Power Before Opening
These Panels.
Qualified Operators Only.
!
G7 ASD Operation Manual 3
Qualified Personnel
Installation, operation, and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only. A Qualified
Person is one that has the skills and knowledge relating to the construction, installation, operation, and
maintenance of the electrical equipment and has received safety training on the hazards involved (Refer
to the latest edition of NFPA 70E for additional safety requirements).
Qualified Personnel shall:
• Have carefully read the entire operation manual.
• Be familiar with the construction and function of the ASD, the equipment being driven, and the
hazards involved.
• Able to recognize and properly address hazards associated with the application of motor-driven
equipment.
• Be trained and authorized to safely energize, de-energize, ground, lockout/tagout circuits and
equipment, and clear faults in accordance with established safety practices.
• Be trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as safety shoes, rubber gloves,
hard hats, safety glasses, face shields, flash clothing, etc., in accordance with established safety
practices.
• Be trained in rendering first aid.
For further information on workplace safety visit www.osha.gov.
Equipment Inspection
• Upon receipt of the equipment inspect the packaging and equipment for shipping damage.
• Carefully unpack the equipment and check for parts that were damaged during shipping, missing
parts, or concealed damage. If any discrepancies are discovered, it should be noted with the carrier
prior to accepting the shipment, if possible. File a claim with the carrier if necessary and
immediately notify your Toshiba sales representative.
•DO NOT install or energize equipment that has been damaged. Damaged equipment may fail
during operation resulting in equipment damage or personal injury.
• Check to see that the rated capacity and the model number specified on the nameplate conform to
the order specifications.
• Modification of this equipment is dangerous and must not be performed except by factory trained
representatives. When modifications are required contact your Toshiba sales representative.
• Inspections may be required before and after moving installed equipment.
• Keep the equipment in an upright position.
• Contact your Toshiba sales representative to report discrepancies or for assistance if required.
4G7 ASD Operation Manual
Handling and Storage
• Use proper lifting techniques when moving the ASD; including properly sizing up the load, getting
assistance, and using a forklift if required.
• Store in a well-ventilated covered location and preferably in the original carton if the equipment
will not be used upon receipt.
• Store in a cool, clean, and dry location. Avoid storage locations with extreme temperatures, rapid
temperature changes, high humidity, moisture, dust, corrosive gases, or metal particles.
• The storage temperature range of the G7 ASD is 14° to 104° F (-10 to 40° C).
• Do not store the unit in places that are exposed to outside weather conditions (i.e., wind, rain, snow,
etc.).
• Store in an upright position.
Disposal
Never dispose of electrical components via incineration. Contact your state environmental agency for
details on disposal of electrical components and packaging in your area.
Installation Precautions
Location and Ambient Requirements
• The Toshiba ASD is intended for permanent installations only.
• Installation should conform to the 2002 National Electrical Code — Article 110 (NEC)
(Requirements For Electrical Installations), all regulations of the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration, and any other applicable national, regional, or industry codes and
standards.
• Select a mounting location that is easily accessible, has adequate personnel working space, and
adequate illumination for adjustment, inspection, and maintenance of the equipment (refer to 2002
NEC Article 110-13).
• A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area immediately surrounding
the electrical system.
•Do Not mount the ASD in a location that would produce catastrophic results if it were to fall from
its mounting location (equipment damage or injury).
•Do Not mount the ASD in a location that would allow it to be exposed to flammable chemicals or
gases, water, solvents, or other fluids.
• Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, fibers, steel particles, explosive/
corrosive mists or gases, or sources of electrical noise are present.
• The installation location shall not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Allow proper clearance spaces for installation. Do not obstruct the ventilation openings. Refer to
the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 17 for further information on ventilation
requirements.
• The ambient operating temperature range of the G7 ASD is 14° to 104° F (-10 to 40° C).
• See the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 17 for additional information on installing
the drive.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 5
Mounting Requirements
• Only Qualified Personnel should install this equipment.
• Install the unit in a secure and upright position in a well-ventilated area.
• A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area immediately surrounding
the electrical system at the place where maintenance operations are to be performed.
• As a minimum, the installation of the equipment should conform to the NEC Article 110
Requirements For Electrical Installations, OSHA, as well as any other applicable national, regional,
or industry codes and standards.
• Installation practices should conform to the latest revision of NFPA 70E Electrical Safety
Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
• It is the responsibility of the person installing the ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel to
ensure that the unit is installed into an enclosure that will protect personnel against electric shock.
Conductor Routing and Grounding
• Use separate metal conduits for routing the input power, output power, and control circuits and each
shall have its own ground cable.
• A separate ground cable should be run inside the conduit with the input power, output power, and
and control circuits.
•DO NOT connect control terminal strip return marked CC to earth ground.
• Always ground the unit to prevent electrical shock and to help reduce electrical noise.
• It is the responsibility of the person installing the ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel to
provide proper grounding and branch circuit protection in accordance with the 2002 NEC and any
applicable local codes.
The Metal Of Conduit Is Not An Acceptable Ground.
Power Connections
Contact With Energized Wiring Will Cause Severe Injury Or Death.
• Turn off, lockout, and tagout all power sources before proceeding to connect the power wiring to
the equipment.
• After ensuring that all power sources are turned off and isolated in accordance with established
lockout/tagout procedures, connect three-phase power source wiring of the correct voltage to the
correct input terminals and connect the output terminals to a motor of the correct voltage and type
for the application (refer to NEC Article 300 – Wiring Methods and Article 310 – Conductors For
General Wiring). Size the branch circuit conductors in accordance with NEC Table 310.16.
• If multiple conductors that are smaller than the recommended sizes are used in parallel for the input
or output power, each branch of the parallel set shall have its own conduit and not share its conduit
with other parallel sets (i.e., place U1, V1, and W1 in one conduit and U2, V2, and W2 in another)
(refer to NEC Article 300.20 and Article 310.4). National and local electrical codes should be
WARNING
DANGER
6G7 ASD Operation Manual
referenced if three or more power conductors are run in the same conduit (refer to 2002 NEC
Article 310 adjustment factors on page 70-142).
• Ensure that the 3-phase input power is Not connected to the output of the ASD. This will damage
the ASD and may cause injury to personnel.
• Do not install the ASD if it is damaged or if it is missing any component(s).
•Do Not connect resistors across terminals PA – PC or PO – PC. This may cause a fire.
• Ensure the correct phase sequence and the desired direction of motor rotation in the Bypass mode
(if applicable).
• Turn the power on only after attaching and/or securing the front cover.
Protection
• Ensure that primary protection exists for the input wiring to the equipment. This protection must be
able to interrupt the available fault current from the power line. The equipment may or may not be
equipped with an input disconnect (option).
• All cable entry openings must be sealed to reduce the risk of entry by vermin and to allow for
maximum cooling efficiency.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
• If using multiple motors provide separate overload protection for each motor and use V/f control.
• External dynamic braking resistors must be thermally protected.
• It is the responsibility of the person installing the ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel to
setup the Emergency Off braking system of the ASD. The function of the Emergency Off braking
function is to remove output power from the drive in the event of an emergency. A supplemental
braking system may also be engaged in the event of an emergency. For further information on
braking systems, see DC Injection Braking Start Frequency on pg. 105 and Dynamic Braking
Enable on pg. 112.
Note: A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD. Emergency
stopping should not be a task of the ASD alone.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 7
System Integration Precautions
The following precautions are provided as general guidelines for the setup of the ASD within the
system.
• The Toshiba ASD is a general-purpose product. It is a system component only and the system
design should take this into consideration. Please contact your Toshiba sales representative for
application-specific information or for training support.
• The Toshiba ASD is part of a larger system and the safe operation of the ASD will depend on
observing certain precautions and performing proper system integration.
• A detailed system analysis and job safety analysis should be performed by the systems designer
and/or systems integrator before the installation of the ASD component. Contact your Toshiba sales
representative for options availability and for application-specific system integration information if
required.
Personnel Protection
• Installation, operation, and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only.
• A thorough understanding of the ASD will be required before the installation, operation, or
maintenance of the ASD.
• Rotating machinery and live conductors can be hazardous and shall not come into contact with
humans. Personnel should be protected from all rotating machinery and electrical hazards at all
times.
• Insulators, machine guards, and electrical safeguards may fail or be defeated by the purposeful or
inadvertent actions of workers. Insulators, machine guards, and electrical safeguards are to be
inspected (and tested where possible) at installation and periodically after installation for potential
hazardous conditions.
• Do not allow personnel near rotating machinery. Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or
near the machinery.
• Do not allow personnel near electrical conductors. Human contact with electrical conductors can be
fatal. Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the hazard.
• Personal protection equipment shall be provided and used to protect employees from any hazards
inherent to system operation.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
System Setup Requirements
• When using the ASD as an integral part of a larger system, it is the responsibility of the ASD
installer or maintenance personnel to ensure that there is a fail-safe in place, i.e., an arrangement
designed to switch the system to a safe condition if there is a fault or failure.
• System safety features should be employed and designed into the integrated system in a manner
such that system operation, even in the event of system failure, will not cause harm or result in
personnel injury or system damage (i.e., E-Off, Auto-Restart settings, System Interlocks, etc.).
• The programming setup and system configuration of the ASD may allow it to start the motor
unexpectedly. A familiarity with the Auto-restart settings are a requirement to use this product.
WARNING
8G7 ASD Operation Manual
• Improperly designed or improperly installed system interlocks may render the motor unable to start
or stop on command.
• The failure of external or ancillary components may cause intermittent system operation, i.e., the
system may start the motor without warning.
• There may be thermal or physical properties, or ancillary devices integrated into the overall system
that may allow for the ASD to start the motor without warning. Signs at the equipment installation
must be posted to this effect.
• If a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) is used between the ASD and the load, it should be
interlocked to halt the ASD before the secondary contact opens. If the output contactor is used for
bypass operation, it must be interlocked such that commercial power is never applied to the ASD
output terminals (U, V, W).
• Power factor improvement capacitors or surge absorbers must not be installed on the output of the
ASD.
• Use of the built-in system protective features is highly recommended (i.e., E-Off, Overload
Protection, etc.).
• The operating controls and system status indicators should be clearly readable and positioned
where the operator can see them without obstruction.
• Additional warnings and notifications shall be posted at the equipment installation location as
deemed required by Qualified Personnel.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
Operational and Maintenance Precautions
• Turn off, lockout, and tagout the main power, the control power, and instrumentation connections
before inspecting or servicing the drive, or opening the door of the enclosure.
• Turn off, lockout, and tagout the main power, the control power, and instrumentation connections
before proceeding to disconnect or connect the power wiring to the equipment.
• The capacitors of the ASD maintain a residual charge for a period of time after turning the ASD off.
The required time for each ASD typeform is indicated with a cabinet label and a Charge LED.
Wait for at least the minimum time indicated on the enclosure-mounted label and ensure that the
Charge LED has gone out before opening the door of the ASD once the ASD power has been
turned off.
• Turn the power on only after attaching (or closing) the front cover and Do Not remove the front
cover of the ASD when the power is on.
•Do Not attempt to disassemble, modify, or repair the ASD. Call your Toshiba sales representative
for repair information.
• Do not place any objects inside of the ASD.
• If the ASD should emit smoke or an unusual odor or sound, turn the power off immediately.
• The heat sink and other components may become extremely hot to the touch. Allow the unit to cool
before coming in contact with these items.
• Remove power from the ASD during extended periods of non-use.
• The system should be inspected periodically for damaged or improperly functioning parts,
cleanliness, and to ensure that the connectors are tightened securely.
WARNING
G7 ASD Operation Manual 9
• Ensure that the Run functions (F, R, Preset Speed, etc.) of the ASD are off before performing a
Reset. The post-reset settings may allow the ASD to start unexpectedly.
•Retry or Reset settings may allow the motor to start unexpectedly. Warnings to this effect should
be clearly posted near the ASD and motor.
• In the event of a power failure, the motor may restart after power is restored.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
DO NOT install, operate, perform maintenance, or dispose of this equipment until you have read and
understood all of the product warnings and user directions. Failure to do so may result in equipment
damage, operator injury, or loss of life.
Service Life Information
Part Name Service Life Remarks
Large Capacity Electrolytic
Capacitor 5 Years When not used for long periods,
charge semi-annually.
Cooling Fan 26,000 Hours
CN Connectors 100 Connects/Disconnects
On-board Relays 500,000 Actuations
10 G7 ASD Operation Manual
CE Compliance Requirements
In addition to the local and regional safety requirements, this section describes additional criteria that
must be met to qualify for European Conformity (CE) certification. All relevant apparatus placed on
the European market is required to comply to the European Community directive on electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC). The following instructions provide a means of compliance for the 7-series of
ASDs. A Technical Construction File (TFC) indicates the rationale used to declare compliance and is on
file at Toshiba International Corporation, Houston, Texas U.S.A.
EMC Installation Guidelines
All systems placed on the European market are required to comply with the European Community
directive regarding electromagnet compatibility (EMC). Toshiba ensures that all systems deployed in
the European market have been screened and are in 100% compliance with the following standards:
• Radiated Interference: EN 55011 Group 1 Class A
• Mains Interference: EN 55011 Group 1 Class A
• Radiated Susceptibility: IEC 801-3 1984
• Conducted RFI Susceptibility: prEN55101-4 (prIEC801-6) Doc 90/30270
• Electrostatic Discharge: IEC801-2 1991
• Electrical Fast Transient: IEC 801-4 1988
• Surge: IEC1000-4-5 1995 2 KV line-to-line, 4 KV line-to-earth
• Voltage Interruption: IEC 1000-4-11
General EMC Guidelines for Consideration
• Input filters of the appropriate rating shall be used.
• Proper grounding is a requirement.
• Grounds shall be kept to the minimum length to accomplish the connection.
• Grounds shall have low RF impedance.
• A central ground shall employed in a complex system.
• Paint or corrosion can hamper good grounding; remove as required.
• Keep control and power cabling separated. Minimize exposed (unscreened) cable.
• Use 3600 screened connections where possible.
CE Compliant Installation Guidelines
ASDs should be installed in accordance with the following guidelines.
1. Filtering — An input filter shall be used with the ASD. A Schaffner FN258 series input filter of the
appropriate rating shall be mounted next to the ASD.
2. Mechanical — The ASD and the associated equipment shall be mounted on a flat metallic
backplane. A minimum space of 5 cm (2 inches) shall be between the ASD and the filter to allow
for ventilation. The filter output cable is to be connected from the bottom of the filter to the ASD
power input and is to be the minimum length required for a connection. See Table 1 on page 11 for
filter selection assistance.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 11
Units received as an Open Chassis shall not be placed into operation until being placed into an
approved enclosure that will protect personnel against electrical shock.
Opening and closing of enclosures or barriers should be possible only with the use of a key or a
tool.
3. Cabling — The power, filter, and motor cables shall be of the appropriate current rating. The
cables shall be connected in accordance with the guidelines of the manufacturer and the applicable
local and national agencies. A 4-core screened cable (such as RS 379-384) is to be used for the
power and earth connections to minimize RF emissions. Control cabling must be screened using
P/N RS 367-347 or a similar component.
4. Grounding — The mains (input) ground shall be connected at the ground terminal provided on the
filter. The filter and motor shall be grounded at the ground terminals provided in the ASD.
5. Screening — The mains (input) screen is to be connected to the metallic back-plane at the filter;
remove any finish coating as required. The screen over the filter output cables, the motor cable
screen, and the control wire screens must be connected to the ASD case using glands or conduit
connectors. The motor cable screen shall be connected to the motor case. When using a braking
resistor, the cabling between the resistor and ASD shall also be screened. This screen shall connect
to both the ASD enclosure and the resistor enclosure.
6. Where residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) is used for protection in case of direct or
indirect contact, only RCD of type B is allowed on the supply side of this Electronic Equipment
(EE). Otherwise, another protective measure shall be applied, such as separation of the EE from the
environment by double or feinforced insulation, or isolation of the EE and the supply system by a
transformer.
See the G7 Filter Selection below for the recommended input filters for a given typeform.
Table 1.
G7 Filter Selection Table
230V VT130G7U4110B FN258-30
VT130G7U2010B FN258-7 VT130G7U4160B
VT130G7U2015B
FN258-16
VT130G7U4220B FN258-42
VT130G7U2025B VT130G7U4270B FN258-55
VT130G7U2035B VT130G7U4330B
VT130G7U2055B FN258-30 VT130G7U4400B FN258-75
VT130G7U2080B VT130G7U4500B FN258-100
VT130G7U2110B FN258-42 VT130G7U4600B
VT130G7U2160B FN258-75 VT130G7U4750B FN258-130
VT130G7U2220B FN258-100 VT130G7U410KB FN258-180
VT130G7U2270B VT130G7U412KB FS5236-300
VT130G7U2330B FN258-130 VT130G7U415KB
12 G7 ASD Operation Manual
460V VT130G7U420KB
FS5236-500
VT130G7U4015B
FN258-7
VT130G7U425KB
VT130G7U4025B VT130G7U430KB
VT130G7U4035B 600V
VT130G7U4055B FN258-16 VT130G7U6015B
FN258-7VT130G7U4080B VT130G7U6025B
VT130G7U4110B FN258-30 VT130G7U6035B
VT130G7U4160B VT130G7U6055B
FN258-16VT130G7U4220B FN258-42 VT130G7U6080B
VT130G7U4270B FN258-55 VT130G7U6110B
VT130G7U4330B VT130G7U6160B FN258-30
VT130G7U4400B FN258-75 VT130G7U6220B FN258-42
VT130G7U4500B FN258-100 VT130G7U6270B
VT130G7U4600B VT130G7U6330B FN258-55
VT130G7U4750B FN258-130 VT130G7U6400B
VT130G7U410KB FN258-180 VT130G7U6500B FN258-75
VT130G7U412KB FS5236-300 VT130G7U6600B FN258-100
VT130G7U415KB VT130G7U6750B
VT130G7U420KB
FS5236-500
VT130G7U610KB FN258-130
VT130G7U425KB VT130G7U612KB FS5236-180
VT130G7U430KB VT130G7U615KB
VT130G7U4015B
FN258-7
VT130G7U620KB FS5236-300
VT130G7U4025B VT130G7U625KB FS5236-500
VT130G7U4035B VT130G7U630KB
VT130G7U4055B FN258-16
VT130G7U4080B
G7 Filter Selection Table
G7 ASD Operation Manual 13
Motor Characteristics
Listed below are some variable speed AC motor control concepts with which the user of the
G7 Adjustable Speed Drive should become familiar.
Motor Autotuning
Motor production methods may cause minor differences in the motor operation. The negative effects of
these differences may be minimized by using the Autotune feature of the G7 ASD. Autotuning is a
function of the G7 that measures several parameters of the connected motor and places these readings in a
stored table. The software uses the information in the table to help optimize the response of the ASD to
application-specific load and operational requirements. The Autotuning function may be enabled for
automatic tuning, configured manually at F400, or disabled.
The measured parameters include the rotor resistance, the stator resistance, the required excitation
inductance, rotational inertia values, and leakage inductance values.
The G7 ASD is also equipped with a factory-loaded table of motor parameters that fit several different
types of motors. To use this function, disable Autotune and select a motor type at F413.
Pulse Width Modulation Operation
The G7 ASD uses a sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) control system. The output current
waveform generated by the ASD approaches that of a perfect sine wave; however, the output waveform is
slightly distorted. For this reason, the motor may produce more heat, noise, and vibration when operated
by an ASD, rather than directly from commercial power.
Low Speed Operation
Operating a general-purpose motor at lower speeds may cause a decrease in the cooling ability of the
motor. Reducing the torque requirement of the motor at lower speeds will decrease the generated heat at
lower speeds.
When the motor is to be operated at low speed (less than 50% of full speed) and at the rated torque
continuously, a Toshiba VF motor (designed for use in conjunction with an ASD) is recommended. When
the ASD is used with a VF motor, the VF Motor overload protection setting must be enabled (see
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overload ⇒ V/f Motor Enable/Disable).
Overload Protection Adjustment
The G7 ASD software monitors the output current of the system and determines when an overload
condition occurs. The overload current level is a percentage of the rating of the motor. This function
protects the motor from overload.
The default setting for the overload detection circuit is set to the maximum rated current of the ASD at the
factory. This setting will have to be adjusted to match the rating of the motor with which the ASD is to be
used. To change the overload reference level, see Electronic Thermal Protection #1 on pg. 154.
14 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Operation Above 60 Hz
A motor produces more noise and vibration when it is operated at frequencies above 60 Hz. Also, when
operating a motor above 60 Hz, the rated limit of the motor or its bearings may be exceeded; this may void
the motor warranty.
Contact the motor manufacturer for additional information before operating the motor above 60 Hz.
Power Factor Correction
DO NOT connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the output of the ASD.
If the ASD is used with a motor that is equipped with a capacitor for power factor correction, remove the
capacitor from the motor.
Connecting either of these devices to the output of the ASD may cause the ASD to malfunction and trip,
or the output device may cause an over-current condition resulting in damage to the device or the ASD.
Light Load Conditions
When a motor is operated under a continuous light load (i.e., at a load of less than 50% of its rated
capacity) or it drives a load which produces a very small amount of inertia, it may become unstable and
produce abnormal vibration or trips because of an over-current condition. In such a case, the carrier
frequency may be lowered to compensate for this undesirable condition (see Program ⇒ Special Control
Parameters ⇒ Carrier Frequency).
Note: For proper operation, the carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or above except when
operating in the Constant Torque, Variable Torque, or the 5-Point Setting modes.
Motor/Load Combinations
When the ASD is used in combination with one of the following motors or loads, it may result in unstable
operation.
• A motor with a rated capacity that exceeds the motor capacity recommended for the ASD.
• An explosion-proof motor.
When using the ASD with an explosion-proof motor or other special motor types, lower the carrier
frequency to stabilize the operation. DO NOT set the carrier frequency below 2.2 kHz if operating the
system in the vector control mode.
Note: For proper operation, the carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or above except when
operating in the Constant Torque, Variable Torque, or the 5-Point Setting modes.
• If the motor that is coupled to a load that has a large backlash or a reciprocating load, use one of the
following procedures to stabilize its operation.
• Adjust the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration setting,
• If in the Vector control mode, adjust the response time, or
• Switch to the Constant Torque control mode.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 15
Load-produced Negative Torque
When the ASD is used with a load that produces negative torque (an overhauling load), the over-voltage
or over-current protective functions of the ASD may cause nuisance tripping.
To minimize the undesirable effects of negative torque the dynamic braking system may be used. The
dynamic braking system converts the regenerated energy into heat that is dissipated using a braking
resistor. The braking resistor must be suitably matched to the load. Dynamic braking is also effective in
reducing the DC bus voltage during a momentary over-voltage condition.
If under extreme conditions the dynamic braking system or a component of this system were to fail, the
dynamic braking resistor may experience an extended over-current condition. The DBR circuit was
designed to dissipate excessive amounts of heat and if the extended over-current condition were allowed
to exceed the circuit parameters, this condition could result in a fire hazard.
To combat this condition, the 3-phase input may be connected using contactors that are configured to open
in the event of an extended DBR over-current condition or an internal circuit failure. Using a thermal
sensor and/or overload protection as the 3-phase input contactor drive signal, the contactors will open and
remove the 3-phase input power in the event of an extended DBR over-current or system over-voltage
condition.
Motor Braking
The motor may continue to rotate and coast to a stop after being shut off due to the inertia of the load. If an
immediate stop is required, a braking system should be used. The two most common types of motor
braking systems used with the G7 ASD are DC Injection Braking and Dynamic Braking.
For further information on braking systems, see DC Injection Braking on pg. 105 and Dynamic
Braking Enable on pg. 112.
CAUTION
16 G7 ASD Operation Manual
ASD Characteristics
Over-current Protection
Each G7 ASD model was designed for a specified operating power range. The ASD will incur a trip if the
design specifications are exceeded.
However, the ASD may be operated at 110% of the specified output-current range continuously or at
150% for a limited amount of time as indicated in the section titled Current/Voltage Specifications on pg.
193. Also, the Overcurrent Stall Level may be adjusted to help with nuisance over-current trips (see
F601).
When using the ASD for an application that controls a motor which is rated significantly less than the
maximum current rating of the ASD, the over-current limit (Thermal Overload Protection) setting will
have to be changed to match the application. For further information on this parameter, see Electronic
Thermal Protection #1 on pg. 154.
ASD Capacity
The G7 ASD must not be used with a motor that has a significantly larger capacity, even if the motor is
operated under a small load. An ASD being used in this way will be susceptible to a high-output peak
current which may result in nuisance tripping.
Do not apply a level of input voltage to an ASD that is beyond that which the ASD is rated. The input
voltage may be stepped down when required with the use of a step-down transformer or some other type
of voltage-reduction system.
Using Vector Control
Using Vector Control enables the system to produce very high torque over the entire operating range
even at extremely low speeds. Vector Control may be used with or without feedback. However, using
feedback increases the speed accuracy for applications requiring precise speed control. Enabling the
Automatic Energy Savings further increases the efficiency of the G7 ASD while maintaining its robust
performance.
Vector Control is not capable of operating multiple motors connected in parallel.
See F015 on pg. 64 for further information on using Vector Control.
Local/Remote Operation
While running in the Local mode at a non-zero speed, if the RJ45 connector is removed from the EOI and
then reinserted, the ASD remains in the Local mode even though the Local LED is off (press Run to
illuminate the Local LED). The ASD output remains at the frequency of the Frequency Command field
at the time of the disconnect so long as the connector is disconnected.
Once reinserted, the reference frequency that was loaded into the EEPROM (not RAM) before the
disconnect will be the frequency to which the ASD output will return.
To prevent this condition, before disconnecting the RJ45 connector ensure that the ASD is off.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 17
Installation and Connections
The G7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive may be set up initially by performing a few
simple configuration settings. To operate properly, the ASD must be securely mounted and connected to
a power source (3-phase AC input at the L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T terminals). The control terminals of the
ASD may be used by connecting the terminals of the Control Terminal Strip to the proper sensors or
signal input sources (see the section titled I/O and Control on pg. 22).
Note: The optional ASD-Multicom boards may be used to expand the I/O functionality of
the ASD. See the section titled G7 Optional Devices on pg. 200 for further
information on the available options.
The output terminals of the ASD (T1/U, T2/V, and T3/W) must be connected to the motor that is to be
controlled (see Figure 18 on pg. 30).
As a minimum, the installation of the ASD shall conform to Article 110 of the 2002 NEC, the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements, and to any other local and regional
industry codes and standards.
Upon initial system powerup, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. The Startup Wizard assists the
user with the initial configuration of the G7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive. See the
section titled Initial Setup on pg. 38 for additional information on the Startup Wizard.
Installation Notes
When a brake-equipped motor is connected to the ASD, it is possible that the brake may not release at
startup because of insufficient voltage. To avoid this, Do Not connect the brake or the brake contactor to
the output of the ASD.
If an output contactor is used for bypass operation, it must be interlocked such that commercial power is
never applied to the output terminals of the ASD (T1/U, T2/V, or T3/W).
If a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) is used between the output of the ASD and the motor, it should
be interlocked such that the ST – CC connection is disconnected before the output contactor is opened.
Do Not open and then close a secondary magnetic contactor between the ASD and the motor unless the
ASD is off and the motor is not rotating.
Note: Re-application of power via a secondary contact while the ASD is on or while the
motor is still turning may cause ASD damage.
On some devices the ST-to-CC connection is further enhanced by the operation of the MS1 AUX relay
circuit. The MS1 AUX relay circuit is normally open and closes the ST-to-CC connection (via ST1)
only after normal system power is available. The MS1 AUX relay circuit prohibits the ST-to-CC
connection in the event that the MS1 contactor fails to close during start up or if MS1 opens while the
ASD is running. For the 230 volt ASD this feature is available on the 30 HP system, on the 460 volt
ASD this feature is available on the 75 HP and above systems, and on the 600 volt ASD it is available
on the 60 HP and above systems.
Figure 2. ST activation using the MS1 AUX circuit configuration.
18 G7 ASD Operation Manual
The ASD input voltage should remain within 10% of the specified input voltage range. Input voltages
approaching the upper or lower limit settings may require that the overvoltage and undervoltage stall
protection level parameters, F626 and F629, be adjusted. Voltages outside of the permissible tolerance
should be avoided.
The frequency of the input power should be ±2 Hz of the specified input frequency.
Do not use an ASD with a motor that has a power rating that is higher than the rated output of the ASD.
The ASD is designed to operate NEMA B motors. Consult with your sales representative before using
the ASD for special applications such as with an explosion-proof motor or applications with a piston
load.
Do Not apply commercial power to the output terminals T1/U, T2/V, or T3/W.
Disconnect the ASD from the motor before megging or applying a bypass voltage to the motor.
Interface problems may occur when an ASD is used in conjunction with some types of process
controllers. Signal isolation may be required to prevent controller and/or ASD malfunction (contact
your Toshiba sales representative or the process controller manufacturer for additional information
about compatibility and signal isolation).
Use caution when setting the output frequency. Over speeding a motor decreases its ability to deliver
torque and may result in damage to the motor and/or the driven equipment.
All G7 ASDs are equipped with internal DC bus fuses. However, not all G7 ASDs are equipped with
internal primary power input fuses (HP dependent). When connecting two or more drives that have no
internal fuse to the same power line as shown in Figure 3, it will be necessary to select a circuit-
breaking configuration that will ensure that if a short circuit occurs in ASD 1, only MCCB2 trips, not
MCCB1. If it is not feasible to use this configuration, insert a fuse between MCCB2 and ASD 1.
Mounting the ASD
Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight using the mounting holes
on the rear of the ASD.
The ambient temperature rating for the G7 ASD is from 14 to 104° F (-10 to 40° C). The process of
converting AC to DC, and then back to AC produces heat. During normal ASD operation, up to 5% of
the input energy to the ASD may be dissipated as heat. If installing the ASD in a cabinet, ensure that
there is adequate ventilation.
Do Not operate the ASD with the enclosure door open.
Figure 3. Circuit breaker configuration.
CAUTION
G7 ASD Operation Manual 19
When installing multiple ASDs, ensure that there is a clearance space of at least 8 inches (20 cm) from
the top and the bottom of adjacent units. There should be at least 2 inches (5 cm) on either side of
adjacent units. For the models below 50 HP the top and bottom clearance specifications may be reduced
to 4 inches (10 cm). This space ensures that adequate ventilation is provided (see the section titled
Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information on pg. 182 for additional information on
mounting space requirements).
Note: Ensure that the ventilation openings are not obstructed.
ASDs produce high-frequency noise — steps must be taken during installation to avoid the negative
effects of noise. Listed below are some examples of measures that will help to combat noise problems.
• Separate the input and output power conductors of the main circuit. Do not install the input and
output wires in the same duct or in parallel with each other, and do not bind them together.
• Do not install the input or output power conductors of the main circuit and the wires of the control
circuit in the same duct or in parallel with each other, and do not bind them together.
• Use shielded wires or twisted wires for the control circuits.
• Ensure that the grounding terminals (G/E) of the ASD are securely connected to ground.
• Connect a surge suppressor to every electromagnetic contactor and every relay installed near the
ASD.
• Install noise filters as required.
Connecting the ASD
Refer to the section titled Installation Precautions on pg. 4 and the section titled Lead Length
Specifications on pg. 21 before attempting to connect the ASD and the motor to electrical power.
System Grounding
Proper grounding helps to prevent electrical shock and to reduce electrical noise. The ASD is designed
to be grounded in accordance with Article 250 of the 2002 NEC or Section 10/Part One of the
Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).
The grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with Article 250-122 of the NEC or Part One-
Table 6 of the CEC.
Note: The metal of conduit is not an acceptable ground.
The input, output, and control lines of the system shall be run in separate metal conduits and each shall
have its own ground conductor.
Power Connections
L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T are the 3-phase input supply terminals for the ASD. The ASD may be operated
from a single-phase supply. When operating using a single-phase supply, use the L1 and L3 terminals.
T1/U, T2/V, and T3/W are the output terminals of the ASD that connect to the motor.
DANGER
DANGER
20 G7 ASD Operation Manual
An inductor may be connected across terminals PA and PO to provide additional filtering. When not
used, a jumper is connected across these terminals (see Figure 18 on pg. 30).
Connect the input and output power lines of the ASD as shown in Figure 4.
Note: In the event that the motor rotates in the wrong direction when powered up, reverse
any two of the three ASD output power leads connected to the motor.
Figure 4. ASD/Motor connection diagram.
Connect the 3-phase input power to the input terminals of the ASD at L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T. Connect
the output of the ASD to the motor from terminals T1/U, T2/V, and T3/W. The input and output
conductors and terminal lugs used shall be in accordance with the requirements listed in the section
titled Cable/Terminal Specifications on pg. 195.
If multiple conductors are used in parallel for the input or output power and it is necessary to use
separate conduits, each parallel set shall have its own conduit and not share its conduit with other
parallel sets (i.e., place U1, V1, and W1 in one conduit and U2, V2, and W2 in another) (refer to NEC
Article 300.20 and Article 310.4). National and local electrical codes should be referenced if three or
more power conductors are run in the same conduit (refer to 2002 NEC Article 310 adjustment factors).
Note: National and local codes should be referenced when running more than three
conductors in the same conduit.
Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or fuse between the 3-phase power source and the ASD in
accordance with the fault current setting of the ASD and 2002 NEC Article 430.
For 600 volt ASDs, the 15 HP or less ASDs (P/N VT130G7U6015B – 6160B) require a class-J fuse
rated at 600 Volts/30 A.
A phase-shifting transformer (or other means) must be supplied by the user when configured for 12-
pulse operation.
External fuses are required on the ASDs listed below when configured for 12-pulse operation.
VT130G7U2600B(DR)
VT130G7U2750B(DR)
VT130G7U412KB(DR)
VT130G7U415KB(DR)
VT130G7U610KB(DR)
VT130G7U612KB(DR)
VT130G7U615KB(DR)
Use either the Ferraz Shawmut Semiconductor fuse (P/N A70QS200) and fuse block P234C, or the
Toshiba ASD-FUSEKIT-12P. The Toshiba kit includes the required fuses and the mounting hardware
for the fuses.
CAUTION
G7 ASD Operation Manual 21
Lead Length Specifications
Adhere to the NEC and any local codes during the installation of ASD/Motor systems. Excessive lead
lengths may adversely effect the performance of the motor. Special cables are not required. Lead lengths
from the ASD to the motor in excess of those listed in Table 2 may require filters to be added to the output
of the ASD. Table 2 lists the suggested maximum lead lengths for the listed motor voltages.
Note: Contact Toshiba for application assistance when using lead lengths in excess of those
listed.
Exceeding the peak voltage rating or the allowable thermal rise time of the motor
insulation will reduce the life expectancy of the motor.
For proper operation, the carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or above except when
operating in the Constant Torque, Variable Torque, or the 5-Point Setting modes.
Startup and Test
Perform the following checks before turning on the unit:
•L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T are connected to the 3-phase input power.
•T1/U, T2/V, and T3/W are connected to the motor.
• The 3-phase input voltage is within the specified tolerance.
• There are no shorts and all grounds are secured.
Table 2.
Model PWM Carrier
Frequency
NEMA MG-1-1998 Section IV Part 31
Compliant Motors2
230 Volt All 1000 feet
460 Volt < 5 kHz 600 feet
≥ 5 kHz 300 feet
600 Volt < 5 kHz 200 feet
≥ 5 kHz 100 feet
22 G7 ASD Operation Manual
I/O and Control
The ASD can be controlled by several input types and combinations thereof, as well as operate within a
wide range of output frequency and voltage levels. This section discusses the ASD control methods and
supported I/O functions.
The Control Terminal Strip PCB (P/N 48570) supports discrete and analog I/O functions and is shown
in Figure 6 on pg. 25. Table 3 lists the names, the default settings, and the descriptions of the input and
output terminals of the Control Terminal Strip PCB.
Note: To use the input control lines of the Control Terminal Strip the Command Mode
setting must be set to Use Control Terminal Strip (Program ⇒ Fundamental
Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode ⇒ Use Control
Terminal Strip).
Figure 18 on pg. 30 shows the basic connection diagram for the G7 system.
Table 3. Control Terminal Strip default assignment terminal names and functions.
Default
Term.
Setting Input/Output Default Function
(also see Terminal Descriptions on pg. 23)Circuit Config.
ST Discrete Input Standby (jumper to CC to operate the unit) — Multifunctional
programmable discrete input (see Installation Notes on pg. 17 for further
information on this terminal).
Figure 8 on pg. 29.
RES Discrete Input Reset — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
FDiscrete Input Forward — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
RDiscrete Input Reverse — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
S1 Discrete Input Preset Speed 1 — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
S2 Discrete Input Preset Speed 2 — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
S3 Discrete Input Preset Speed 3 — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
S4 Discrete Input Emergency Off — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
RR Analog Input RR — Multifunction programmable analog input
(0.0 to 10 volt input — 0 to 80 Hz output). Reference CC.Figure 9 on pg. 29.
RX Analog Input RX — Multifunctional programmable analog input
(-10 to +10 VDC input — -80 to +80 Hz output). Reference CC.Figure 10 on pg. 29.
II Analog Input
II — Multifunctional programmable analog input (4 [0] to 20 mADC
input — 0 to 80 Hz output) (see Figure 6 on pg. 25 for the location of
the II terminal). Reference CC.Figure 11 on pg. 29.
VI Analog Input VI — Multifunctional programmable analog input
(0 to 10 VDC input — 0 to 80 Hz output). Reference CC.
P24 DC Output 24 VDC @ 50 mA output. Figure 12 on pg. 29.
PP DC Output PP — 10.0 VDC voltage source for the external potentiometer. Figure 13 on pg. 29.
OUT1 Discrete Output Low Frequency — Multifunctional programmable discrete output. Figure 14 on pg. 29.
OUT2 Discrete Output Reach Frequency — Multifunctional programmable discrete output.
FP Output Frequency Pulse — an output pulse train that has a frequency which is
based on the output frequency of the ASD. Figure 15 on pg. 29.
AM Output Produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the
function assigned to this terminal (see Table 7 on page 61). Figure 16 on pg. 29
FM Output
FLC Output Fault relay (common).
Figure 17 on pg. 29.FLB Output Fault relay (N.C.).
FLA Output Fault relay (N.O.).
CC —Control common (Do Not connect to Earth Gnd).
Discrete Input Terminals ⇒ Connect to CC to activate.
Analog Input Terminals reference CC.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 23
Terminal Descriptions
Note: The programmable terminal assignments may be accessed and changed from their
default settings as mapped on pg. 47 or via the Direct Access method: Program ⇒
Direct Access ⇒ applicable parameter number. See the section titled Program Mode
on pg. 47 for the applicable Direct Access parameter numbers.
For further information on terminal assignments and default setting changes, see the
section titled Output Terminal Functions on pg. 49 and CHANGED FROM DEFAULT
on pg. 47.
ST — The default setting for this terminal is ST. The function of this input as ST is a Standby mode
controller (system is in Standby when on). As the default setting, this terminal must be connected to
CC for normal operation. If not connected to CC, Off is displayed on the LCD screen. This input
terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 76
(see F113).
RES — The default setting for this terminal is RES. The function of this input as RES is a system
Reset. A momentary connection to CC resets the ASD and any fault indications from the display. This
input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on
page 76 (see F114). Reset is effective when faulted only.
F — The default setting for this terminal is F. The function of this input as F is Forward Run. A
connection to CC runs the motor in the Forward direction when it is on. This input terminal may be
programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 76 (see F111).
R — The default setting for this terminal is R. The function of this input as R is Reverse Run. A
connection to CC runs the motor in the Reverse direction when it is on. This input terminal may be
programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 76 (see F112).
S1 — The default setting for this terminal is S1. The function of this input as S1 is to run the motor at
Preset Speed #1 (see Preset Speed #1 on pg. 66) when it is on. This input terminal may be programmed
to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 76 (see F115).
S2 — The default setting for this terminal is S2. The function of this input as S2 is to run the motor at
Preset Speed #2 (see Preset Speed #2 on pg. 66) when it is on. This input terminal may be programmed
to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 76 (see F116).
S3 — The default setting for this terminal is S3. The function of this input as S3 is to run the motor at
Preset Speed #3 (see Preset Speed #3 on pg. 67) when it is on. This input terminal may be programmed
to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 76 (see F117).
S4 — The default setting for this terminal is Emergency Off (normally closed). The function of this
input as Emergency Off is to remove power from the output of the ASD and may apply a supplemental
braking system using the method selected at F603. This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of
the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 76 (see F118).
RR — The default function assigned to this terminal is to carry out the Frequency Mode #1 setting.
The RR terminal accepts a 0 – 10 VDC input signal that controls the function assigned to this terminal.
This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor. It may also be used
to regulate (limit) the speed or torque of the motor. The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted
for application-specific suitability (see F210 – F213).
RX — The RX terminal accepts a ±10 VDC input signal that controls the function assigned to this
terminal. This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed, torque, or direction of the motor.
It may also be used to regulate (limit) the speed or torque of the motor. The gain and bias of this
terminal may be adjusted for application-specific suitability (see F216 – F219).
24 G7 ASD Operation Manual
II — The function of the II input is to receive a 4 – 20 mA input signal that controls a 0 – 80 Hz output.
This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor and may not be used
when using the VI input. Also, the gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted (see F201 – F204).
VI — The function of the VI input terminal is to receive a 0 – 10 VDC input signal that controls a
0 – 80 Hz output. This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor and
may not be used when using the II input. Also, the gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted (see
F201 – F204).
P24 — +24 VDC @ 50 mA power supply for customer use.
PP — The function of output PP is to provide a 10 VDC output that may be divided using a potentiometer.
The tapped voltage is applied to the RR input to provide manual control of the RR programmed function.
OUT1 — The default setting for this output terminal is the Output Low Speed indicator. This output
terminal may be programmed to provide an indication that 1 of 60 possible events has taken place. This
function may be used to signal external equipment or to activate the brake (see F130). The OUT1 contact
is rated at 2A/250 VAC.
OUT2 — The default setting for this output terminal is the ACC/DEC Complete indicator. This output
terminal may be programmed to provide an indication that 1 of 60 possible events has taken place. This
function may be used to signal external equipment or to activate the brake (see F131). The OUT2 contact
is rated at 2A/250 VAC.
FP — The default function of this output terminal is to output a series of pulses at a rate that is a function
of the output frequency of the ASD. As the output frequency of the ASD goes up so does the FP output
pulse rate. This terminal may be programmed to provide output pulses at a rate that is a function of the
output frequency or the magnitude of any 1 of the 31 the functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 61 (see F676).
AM — This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the output frequency of the
ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this
output terminal are listed in Table 7 on page 61. For further information on this terminal see F670 on pg.
163.
FM — This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the output frequency of the
ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this
output terminal are listed in Table 7 on page 61. For further information on this terminal see F005 on pg.
60.
FLC — FLC is the middle leg of a single-pole double-throw (relay) switch. This FLC contact of the relay
is switched between FLB and FLA. This contact may be programmed to switch between FLB and FLA as
a function of any 1 of the 60 conditions listed in Table 9 on page 81 (see F132 and Figure 5 on pg. 24).
FLB — One of two contacts that, under user-defined conditions, connect to FLC (see Figure 5 on pg. 24).
FLA — One of two contacts that, under user-defined conditions, connect to FLC (see Figure 5 on pg. 24).
Note: The FLA and FLC contacts are rated at 2A/250 VAC. The FLB contact is rated at 1A/
250 VAC.
CC — Control common (Do Not connect to Earth Gnd).
Figure 5. FLA, FLB, and FLC switching contacts shown in the de-energized state.
Note: The relay is shown in the Faulted or
de-energized condition. During
normal system operation the relay
connection is FLC-to-FLA.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 25
Figure 6. Control Terminal Strip PCB.
SW1 and SW2 may be
switched to change the full-
scale reading of the AM and
FM output terminals. See
F670 and F005 for further
information on the AM and
FM terminal adjustments.
SW1
TB
1
0–1 mA 4–20 mA
CN7A
{
{
SW2
0–1 mA 4–20 mA
The input and output terminals of the Control Terminal Strip. For further information on
these terminals see pg. 22.
RRP24 RES FARS1S2S3S4C CA
II Terminals
OUT1 OUT2
26 G7 ASD Operation Manual
G7 ASD Control
The Control PCB (P/N 56000) serves as the primary control source for the G7 ASD and receives input
from the Control Terminal Strip PCB (see Figure 6 on pg. 25), an Option Card, RS232/RS485
Communications, or the EOI.
The Control PCB has been enhanced to support two new functions: Multiple Protocol Communications
and the ability to communicate in either half- or full-duplex modes.
Using the optional multiple-protocol communications interface; the ASD-NANOCOM, the Control
PCB may be configured for the type of communications protocol being received and respond
appropriately to the sending device. The ASD-NANOCOM connects to the J4 and J5 connectors
(see Figure 7). A jumper PCB (P/N 55365) is required at the J4 connector if not using the ASD-
NANOCOM.
The ASD-NANOCOM must be setup to support the desired communications protocol via Program ⇒
Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication Settings. Consult the ASD-NANOCOM
User’s Manual (P/N 10572-1.000-000) for a complete listing of the setup requirements.
Half or Full duplex communications is available when using RS232/RS485 communications. The
jumpers at the JP1 and the JP2 connectors may be moved from one position to the other to facilitate
either half- or full-duplex operation. If no jumpers are used the system will operate in the full duplex
mode.
For more information on the G7 ASD communication requirements, please visit
WWW.TIC.TOSHIBA.COM to acquire a copy of the 7-Series Communications User Manual and
WWW.ICCDESIGNS.COM to acquire a copy of the ASD-NANOCOM User Manual.
Contact your Toshiba representative if more information is required on the ASD-NANOCOM.
Figure 7. Control Board of the G7 ASD (P/N 56000).
25-pin D-type connecto
r.
Connects to the Control Termina
l
Strip PCB (CN7).
RS232/RS485
signal I/O (CNU1).
EOI connection and
Common Serial
(TTL) I/O (CNU2).
CNU3
CN2
CN8
CNU4
JP1 jumpers - Half-/Full-Duplex selection.
RS232/RS485
signal I/O (CN3).
ASD-NANOCOM.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 27
CNU1/1A and CNU2/2A Pinout
Note: For normal operation, connect CNU1 to CNU1A or CNU2 to CNU2A. DO NOT
connect both. If both are connected, the TTL and RS232/RS485 signals will be
transferred simultaneously to and from the EOI and the control board resulting in a
Communications Lost error message or erratic ASD operation.
Note: Connecting CNU1 to CNU2A will result in a continuous splash screen display.
Connect CNU1 to CNU1A and continue normally.
Connecting CNU2 to CNU1A will result in a continuous splash screen display.
Connect CNU2 to CNU2A and continue normally.
Note: See the 7-Series Communications Manual (P/N 53840) for further information on the
G7 communications protocol and system configuration requirements.
CN3 Pinout‘
CN3 is used for RS232/RS485 serial communications.
Pin # CNU1 Pinout
(Controller PCB)
CNU1A Pinout
(EOI) Pin # CNU2 Pinout
(Controller PCB)
CNU2A Pinout
(EOI)
1P24 P24 1P24 P24
2Gnd Gnd 2Gnd Gnd
3Tx (-) RXA 3Rx Tx
4Rx (+) TXA 4Gnd Gnd
5Rx (-) TXB 5Tx Rx
6Tx (+) RXB 6Gnd Gnd
7RS232/RS485 CNU3 Pin-7 7Open Open
8Gnd Gnd 8Gnd Gnd
Pin Number CNU3 Pinout
(Controller PCB)
1RS232/RS485 Signal +
2RS232/RS485 Signal -
3RS232/RS485 Signal Gnd
4Shield
28 G7 ASD Operation Manual
CN7 Pinout
Listed below is the pinout of the CN7 connector. The CN7 connector is the 25-pin D-type connector of
the Control Board (see Figure 7).
Table 4. CN7 pinout assignments. Listed are the default settings for programmable terminals.
Pin Number CN7
PInout Pin Number CN7
PInout
1PP 14 II
2FL 15 S1
3VI 16 R
4RR 17 S3
5FM 18 S2
6RX 19 N15
7FP 20 S4
8AM 21 P15
9*OUT1 22 P24
10 *OUT2 23 CC
11 ST 24 CC
12 RES 25 CC
13 F — —
Note: * Open collector outputs.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 29
I/O Circuit Configurations
Figure 8. Discrete input. Figure 9 RR input.
Figure 10. RX input. Figure 11. VI/II input.
Figure 12. P24 Output. Figure 13. PP Output.
Figure 14. OUT1/OUT2 Output. Figure 15. FP Output.
Figure 16. AM/FM Output. Figure 17. Fault Relay (during fault).
30 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Typical Connection Diagram
Figure 18. G7 typical connection diagram.
Note: The AM, FM, VI, and II analog terminals are referenced to CC.
Note: See alternative ST-to-CC activation configuration on pg. 17.
Note: When connecting multiple wires to the PA, PB, PC, or PO
terminals, do not connect a solid wire and a stranded wire to the
same terminal.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 31
Command Mode and Frequency Mode
Control
Command control includes instructions such as Stop, Run, Jog, etc. The source of the Command
signal must be established for normal operation.
Frequency commands control the output speed of the ASD. The source of the frequency (speed)
control signal must be established for normal operation.
The source of the command control and speed control may be either internal or external. Once the
source signal is selected for either function, the system may be configured to use the selected signal all
of the time or switch under user-defined conditions.
Command and Frequency control may be carried out using any one of several control methods (signal
sources) or combinations thereof. In the event that multiple control commands are received, the signal
sources are assigned priority levels. The primary control method for Command and Frequency control
uses the settings of F003 and F004, respectively.
Command Control (F003)
The Command Mode selection of F003 establishes
the primary source of the command input for the ASD.
However, the Override feature may supersede the
F003 setting as indicated in Table 5.
Table 5 shows the hierarchy of the control sources
managed by the Override function. The level of the
control item on the hierarchy is listed from left to
right, most to least, respectively. As indicated in the
table, the Override setting may supersede the F003 setting.
Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects either the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial (TTL) as
the Command Mode control source. Once in the Local mode, the LCD Port Connection setting
determines if the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial (TTL) will be used for Command control.
Local mode operation may be superseded by other Communications Override settings.
Example: With the EOI set to Local and the LCD Port Connection set to Common Serial (TTL),
setting the Communication Card or RS232/RS485 control to Override will supersede the Common
Serial (TTL) setting.
The remaining control sources may be placed into the override mode using communications.
The source of the Command control signal may be selected by:
•The F003 setting,
• Placing an item from the list below in the Override mode via communications, or
• Placing the EOI in the Local mode (places only the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial [TTL] in
the Override mode).
Possible Command signal source selections include the following:
• Use Control Terminal Strip (default),
• Use LED Keypad Option,
• Use Common Serial (TTL),
• Use RS232/RS485,
32 G7 ASD Operation Manual
• Use Communication Card, or
•F003 setting (is used if no signal sources are in the Override mode).
Note: The Control Terminal Strip is placed in the Override mode by assigning a discrete
terminal to Command Control Terminal Strip Priority and connecting the terminal
to CC. Once activated (Run command required), the Control Terminal Strip settings
will be used for Override Command control (F, R, Preset Speeds, etc.).
Frequency Control (F004)
The Frequency Mode #1 (or the Frequency Mode
#2) setting establishes the user-selected source of the
frequency-control input for the ASD. The signal
source selected here is used for speed control unless
the Reference Priority Selection parameter is
configured to automatically switch this setting (see
F200) or if the Override feature is enabled (via
communications or via the Local mode operation).
Table 5 shows the hierarchy of the control sources managed by the Override function. The level of the
control item on the hierarchy is listed from left to right, most to least, respectively. As indicated in the
table, the Override setting may supersede the selection at F004.
Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects either the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial (TTL) as
the Frequency Mode #1 control source. Once in the Local mode, the LCD Port Connection setting
determines if the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial (TTL) will be used for Frequency Mode #1
control. Local mode operation may be superseded by other Communications Override settings.
Example: With the EOI set to Local and the LCD Port Connection set to Common Serial (TTL),
setting the Communication Card or RS232/RS485 control to Override will supersede the Common
Serial (TTL) setting.
The remaining control sources may be placed into the override mode using communications.
The source of the Frequency control signal may be selected by:
•The F004 setting,
• Placing an item from the list below in the Override mode via communications, or
• Placing the EOI in the Local mode (places only the RS232/RS485 or Common Serial in the
Override mode).
Possible Frequency control source selections include the following:
• Communication Card,
• RS232/RS485,
• Common Serial (TTL),
•LED Keypad,
• Control Terminal Strip (default setting), or
•F004 setting (used if no other items are in the Override mode).
Note: The Control Terminal Strip is placed in the Override mode by assigning a discrete
terminal to VI/II Terminal Priority and connecting the terminal to CC. Once the
discrete terminal is activated, VI/II is used as the Control Terminal Strip Override
control item.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 33
Command and Frequency Control Selections
The user may select only one Command source and only one source for Frequency control. The
default settings for Command and Frequency control are Use Control Terminal Strip and Use RR,
respectively.
The G7 ASD has a command register for each item listed as a Command or Frequency source. The
registers store the Override setting for each control source. The registers are continuously scanned to
determine if any of the listed items are in the Override mode.
For each scan cycle, the command registers of the control sources are scanned for the Override setting
in the order that they are listed in Table 5. The first item of the Command section and the first item of
the Frequency section detected as being in the Override mode will be used for Command and
Frequency control, respectively. If no items are detected as being in the Override mode, the settings of
F003 and F004 will be used for Command and Frequency control, respectively.
Any or all of the Command and Frequency control input sources may be placed in the Override
mode.
Placing the G7 ASD in the Local mode (Local/Remote LED on) via the EOI places the RS232/RS485
or the Common Serial (TTL) control selections in the Override mode for Command and Frequency
input (see the section titled Override Operation below for the proper setting). The Local/Remote
control Override feature for Command and Frequency (or either) may be enabled/disabled at Program
⇒ ΕΟΙ Option Setups ⇒ Local-Remote Key (enabled with check in box).
Communications may be used to place the remaining Command and eligible Frequency control input
sources in the Override mode. Once placed in the Override mode this setting is valid until it is
cancelled, the power supply is turned off, or the unit is reset.
34 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Override Operation
The command registers of the listed signal sources are scanned in the order that they are listed in
Table 5 to determine which input sources are in the Override mode. During each register scan cycle, the
first item detected as having the Override function turned on is the selection that is used for Command or
Frequency control input.
The Override control setting supersedes the setting of the Command mode setting (F003) and the
Frequency mode setting (F004). However, the F003 and F004 settings will be used in the event that the
register scan returns the condition that none of the listed items have the Override feature turned on (see
Table 5).
Command and Frequency-Control Override Hierarchy
Table 5 lists the input conditions and the resulting output control source selections for Command and
Frequency control Override operation. The G7 ASD reads the command registers of the listed control
items from the left to the right. In the table the number 1 indicates that the Override feature is turned on for
that control input source; X = Don’t are; and 0 = Override Off.
The first item to be read that has the Override feature turned on will be used for Command or Frequency
control.
Table 5. Command and Frequency control hierarchy.
Command Control Selections
The following is a listing and description of the
Command Mode (F003) selections (Program ⇒
Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Command Mode).
Settings:
Use Control Terminal Strip
Allows for Command control input via the 25-pin
terminal strip on the Control Terminal Strip PCB.
Use LED Keypad Option
The LED Keypad is unavailable at the time of this release.
Use Common (TTL)
Set the LCD Port Connection to Common Serial (TTL) to use this feature.
Use RS232/RS485
Set the LCD Port Connection to RS232/RS485 to use this feature.
Use Communication Card
Routes the control and monitoring I/O to CNU3 of the Control Board of the G7 ASD
(Communication Card connector).
1 2 3 4 5 6 Priority Level
Communication
Card RS232/
RS485 Common
Serial
Panel
(LED
Keypad)
Control Terminal
(Binary/BCD Input) F003/F004 Command/
Frequency Mode
1X X X X X Communication Card
01X X X X RS232/RS485
0 0 1X X X Common Serial
0 0 0 1X X Panel (LED Keypad)
0 0 0 0 1XControl Terminal
0 0 0 0 0 F003/F004 Setting F003/F004 Setting
G7 ASD Operation Manual 35
Frequency Control
Selections
The following is a listing and description of the
Frequency Mode (F003) selections (Program ⇒
Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection
⇒ Frequency Mode #1).
Settings:
Use VI/II
0 to 10-volt DC analog input connected to VI or a
4 – 20 mA (or 0 to 1 mA) DC current connected to
II (cannot use both simultaneously).
Use RR
0 to 10-volt DC analog input connected to RR.
Use RX
-10 to +10-volt DC analog input connected to RX.
Use Option Card RX2
-10 to +10-volt DC analog input connected to RX2.
Use LED Keypad Option
The LED Keypad is unavailable at the time of this release.
Use Binary/BCD Input
Allows for discrete terminal input to control the ASD output.
Use Common Serial (TTL)
To use the EOI for control requires that the LCD Port Connection be set to Common Serial
(TTL) to use this feature.
Use RS232/RS485
To use the EOI for control requires that the LCD Port Connection be set to RS232/RS485 to use
this feature.
Use Communication Card
Routes the control and monitoring I/O to CNU3 of the Control Board of the G7 ASD (Option
Card connector).
Use Motorized Pot Simulation
A discrete terminal may be configured to increase or decrease the speed of the motor by
momentarily connecting the assigned terminal to CC. See Table 8 on page 76 for further
information on this feature.
Use Pulse Input Option
Configures the system to receive pulse input. See PG Speed Reference Setpoint on pg. 103 for
further information on this feature.
36 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Electronic Operator Interface
The G7 Electronic Operator Interface (EOI) is comprised of an LCD display, two LEDs, a rotary
encoder, and eight keys. These items are described below and their locations are provided in
Figure 19 on pg. 37.
The EOI can be mounted remotely from the ASD as described in the section titled EOI Remote Mounting
on pg. 190. The dimensional requirements for remote mounting may also be found in this section. Using a
screw length that exceeds the specified dimensions may cause deformation of the outer surface of the
bezel as shown in Figure 31 on pg. 192 and should be avoided.
The interface can operate up to distances of 15 feet from the ASD via the Common Serial (TTL) Port. For
distances beyond 15 feet, the RS232/RS485 port is recommended.
EOI Features
LCD Display — Displays configuration information, performance data (e.g., motor frequency, bus
voltage, torque, etc.), and diagnostic information.
Local|Remote Key — Toggles the system to and from the Local and Remote modes. The LED is on
when the system is in the Local Command mode. The Local mode allows the Command and Frequency
control functions to be carried out via the EOI.
The Remote mode enables the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the
Control Terminal Strip, LED Keypad, RS232/RS485, Communication Card, or Pulse Input. The
selection may be made via Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Settings ⇒ Command
Mode.
Note: The LED Keypad is under development and is unavailable at the time of the release of
this manual.
The availability of the Local mode of operation (Command and Frequency control) may be disabled via
Program ⇒ EOI Option Setups ⇒ Local/Remote Key. The availability of the Local mode of operation
may be reinstated by changing this setting or performing a Reset (see F007).
Enter Key — Selects a menu item to be changed or accepts and records the changed data of the selected
field (same as pressing the Rotary Encoder).
Esc Key — Returns to the previous level of the menu tree, toggles between the Panel and the Frequency
Command screens, or cancels changes made to a field if pressed while still in the reverse video mode
(dark background/light text). The 3 functions are menu-specific.
Run Key — Issues the Run command while in the Local mode.
Run Key Status LED — Illuminates green while stopped or red while running.
Stop Key — Issues the Off command (decelerates to Stop at the programmed rate) if pressed once while
in the Local mode or initiates an Emergency Off (terminates the ASD output and applies the brake if so
configured) if pressed twice quickly from the Local or Remote modes.
Up Key — Increases the value of the selected parameter or scrolls up the menu listing (continues during
press-and-hold).
Down Key — Decreases the value of the selected parameter or scrolls down the menu listing (continues
during press-and-hold).
G7 ASD Operation Manual 37
Rotary Encoder — Functions as the Up key, the Down key, and the Enter key. Turn the Rotary
Encoder either clockwise or counterclockwise to perform the Up or Down key functions. Press the
Rotary Encoder to perform the Enter function. Simultaneously pressing and turning the Rotary
Encoder performs a user-defined function (see Program ⇒ EOI Option Setup ⇒ Preferences ⇒ Encoder
Action).
MON/PRG (Monitor/Program) — Provides a means to access the three root menus. Pressing the MON/
PRG key repeatedly loops the system through the three root menus (see Figure 21 on pg. 43). While
looping through the root menus, the Program menu will display the last menu screen or sub-menu item
being accessed at the time that the MON/PRG key was pressed.
Figure 19. The G7 Electronic Operator Interface.
EOI Operation
The EOI is the primary input/output device for the user. The EOI may be used to monitor system
functions, input data into the system, or perform diagnostics.
Note: The Up/Down arrow keys and the Enter key may be used to perform the functions of the
Rotary Encoder. The Rotary Encoder will be used in this explanation and throughout
this manual for the Up, Down, and Enter key functions.
The software used with the G7 is menu driven; thus, making it a select and click environment. The
operating parameters of a motor may be selected and viewed or changed using the EOI.
To change a parameter setting, go to the Program mode by pressing the MON/PRG key until the
Program menu is displayed. Turn the Rotary Encoder until the desired parameter group is within the
cursor block. Press the Rotary Encoder (repeat if there is a submenu).
The selection will take on the reverse video format (dark background/light text). Turn the Rotary
Encoder to change the value of the parameter. Press the Esc key while the display is in the reverse video
mode to exit the menu without saving the change or press the Rotary Encoder to accept the new setting.
Repeated Esc key entries takes the menu back one level each time the Esc key is pressed until the root
level is reached. After reaching the root level, continued Esc entries will toggle the system to and from the
Frequency Command screen and the Panel menu.
Note: Panel menu changes entered here will affect EOI-controlled ASD operation only. LED
Keypad-controlled functions will not be affected. LED Keypad-controlled operation
settings may be viewed or changed at F008. See the section titled Panel Menu on pg. 44
for further information on Panel Menu operations.
LCD Display
Up/Down Arrow
Keys
Rotary Encoder
Local/Remote
Monitor/Program
Key
Enter Key
Esc Key
Stop
|
Reset Key
Key (LED)
Run Key
(LED)
38 G7 ASD Operation Manual
System Operation
Initial Setup
Upon initial system powerup, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. The Startup Wizard assists the
user with the initial configuration of the input power settings and the output parameters of the G7 ASD.
The ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the individual parameters (see the section titled
Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 59).
The Startup Wizard may also be selected and run from the Program menu after the initial startup if
required.
The Startup Wizard querys the user for the following information:
1. Run now? (if selected continue on to step #2)/Run next time at power up? (if selected go to
Program Mode)/Manually configure? (if selected go to Finish ⇒ Program Mode).
2. The Voltage and Frequency rating of the motor.
3. The Upper Limit frequency.
4. The Lower Limit frequency.
5. Adjust Accel/Decel times automatically? (if Yes, continue from step #8).
6. The Acceleration time.
7. The Deceleration Time.
8. The Volts/Hertz setting.
9. The motor Current rating.
10. The Command source.
11. The Frequency Reference source.
See the section titled Startup Wizard Requirements on pg. 40 for additional information on the Startup
Wizard.
Operation (Local)
Note: See F003 for information on Remote operation.
To turn the motor on, perform the following:
1. Press the MON/PRG key until the Frequency
Command screen is displayed.
2. Press the Local|Remote key to enter the Local
mode (green Local LED illuminates).
3. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise until the
Frequency Command value is at the desired
setting.
4. Press the Run key and the motor runs at the
Frequency Command value.
Note: The speed of the motor may be changed while
the motor is running by using the Rotary Encoder to change the Frequency Command
value.
5. Press the Stop|Reset key to stop the motor.
Frequency Command Screen
G7 ASD Operation Manual 39
Default Setting Changes
To change a default parameter setting, go to the root of the Program menu and turn the Rotary Encoder
until the desired parameter group is within the cursor block and press the Rotary Encoder (repeat if there
is a submenu).
Press the Rotary Encoder to select the default setting to be changed and the selection takes on the reverse
video format (dark background, light text). Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the value of the
parameter. Press the ESC key before accepting the change to exit the menu without saving the change or
press the Rotary Encoder to accept the new setting.
For a complete listing of the Program mode menu options, see the section titled Program Mode on pg. 47.
Menu items are listed and mapped for convenience. The Direct Access Numbers are listed where
applicable.
The default settings may also be changed by entering the Parameter Number of the setting to be changed
at the Direct Access menu (Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ Applicable Parameter Number). A listing of the
Direct Access Numbers and a description of the associated parameter may be found in the section titled
Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 59.
A listing of all parameters that have been changed from the default setting may be viewed sequentially by
accessing the Changed From Default screen (Program ⇒ Changed From Default).
Note: Parameter F201 was changed to create the example shown in Figure 20.
The Changed From Default feature allows the user to view (or change) the parameters that are different
from the default or the post-reset settings. Once the Changed From Default screen is displayed, the
system automatically scrolls through all of the system parameters and halts once reaching a changed
parameter.
The Rotary Encoder may be clicked once clockwise to continue scrolling forward or clicked once
counterclockwise to begin scrolling in reverse. With each click of the Rotary Encoder from a stop, the
system scrolls through all of the parameters and stops at the next parameter that has been changed.
Pressing the Rotary Encoder while a changed parameter is displayed accesses the settings of the changed
parameter for viewing or changing.
Pressing ESC while the system is performing a Changed From Default search terminates the search.
Pressing ESC when done searching (or halted at a changed parameter) returns the system to the Program
menu.
Figure 20. Changed From Default screen.
40 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Startup Wizard Requirements
The Startup Wizard queries the user for information on the input and output signal parameters of the
ASD. The ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the control settings via the Program
menu or the Direct Access Numbers (see the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg.
59).
Upon initial system powerup, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. It may also be run from the
Program menu after startup if required. The user is queried to either (1) run the Startup Wizard (Run
Now), (2) run the Startup Wizard at the next power up, or (3) perform a manual setting of user-selected
parameters.
If selection (2) is chosen, the system returns to the Program menu and defaults to the Startup Wizard on
the next power up. If selection (3) is chosen, click the subsequent Finish box and the system returns to the
Frequency Command screen. If selection (1) (Run Now) is selected, the Startup Wizard will start and
assist the user with the configuration of the G7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive using the
following user-input screens.
Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor
Motors are designed and manufactured for a specific
voltage and frequency range. The voltage and frequency
specifications for a given motor may be found on the
nameplate of the motor.
Upper Limit Frequency
This parameter sets the highest frequency that the G7 will
accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The
G7 may output frequencies higher than the Upper Limit
Frequency (but, lower than the Maximum Frequency)
when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control
mode, or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or
feedback).
Lower Limit Frequency
This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the G7 will
accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The
G7 will output frequencies lower than the Lower Limit
Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or
decelerating to a stop. Frequencies below the Lower Limit
may be output when operating in the PID Control mode,
Torque Control mode, or the Vector Control modes
(sensorless or feedback).
G7 ASD Operation Manual 41
Adjust Accel/Decel Automatically?
When enabled, the G7 adjusts the acceleration and
deceleration rates according to the applied load. The
acceleration and deceleration times range from 12.5% to
800% of the programmed values for the active
acceleration time [e.g., Acceleration Time #1 (F009)
and Deceleration Time #1 (F010)].
The motor and the load must be connected prior to
selecting Automatic Accel/Decel.
If Automatic Accel/Decel is not enabled, the Acceleration screen will appear followed by the
Deceleration screen as shown below.
Volts per Hertz Setting
This function establishes the relationship between
the output frequency and the output voltage.
Settings:
Constant Torque
Variable Torque
Automatic Torque Boost
Sensorless Vector Control (Speed)
Automatic Torque Boost + Automatic Energy Savings
Sensorless Vector Control (Speed) + Automatic Energy Savings
V/f 5-point Setting (Opens 5-point Setting Screen)
Sensorless Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed/Position Switching)
Motor Current Rating
This parameter allows the user to input the full-load
amperage (FLA) of the motor. This value is used by
the ASD to determine the Thermal Overload
protection setting for the motor and may be found
on the nameplate of the motor.
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
42 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Command Source
This selection allows the user to establish the source
of the Run commands (e.g., F, R, Stop, etc.).
Settings:
Use Control Terminal Strip
Use LED Keypad Option
Use Common Serial (TTL) — (Use for LCD
EOI Operation)
Use RS232/RS485
Use Communication Card
Frequency Reference Source
This selection allows the user to establish the source
of the Frequency (speed) command.
Settings:
Use VI/II
Use RR
Use RX
Use Option Card RX2
Use LED Keypad Option
Use Binary/BCD Input
Use Common Serial (TTL) — (Use for LCD EOI Operation)
Use RS232/RS485
Use Communication Card
Use Motorized Pot Simulation
Use Pulse Input Option
Wizard: Finish
This screen is the final screen of the Startup Wizard.
The basic parameters of the ASD have been set. Click
Finish to return to the Program mode. Additional
application-specific programming may be required.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 43
System Configuration and Menu Options
Root Menus
The MON/PRG key accesses the three primary modes of the G7: the Frequency Command mode, the
Monitor mode, and the Program mode. From either mode, press the MON/PRG key to loop through to
the other two modes (see Figure 21). While in the Frequency Command mode, pressing the ESC key
toggles the menu to and from the Panel menu and the Frequency Command mode.
Note: Panel menu changes made when accessing the Panel menu using the method shown in
Figure 21 is effective for Local LCD EOI control Only.
Figure 21. Root menu mapping.
Frequency Command Mode
Frequency Setting
While operating in the Local mode (Local LED is illuminated on the front panel), the running frequency
of the motor may be set from the Frequency Command screen. Using the Rotary Encoder, enter the
Frequency Command value and then press the Run key. The motor will run at the Frequency
Command speed and may be changed while running.
Scrolling Monitor
The Output Current and the ASD Load values are displayed (default setting) below the Frequency
Command parameter of the Frequency Command screen. Other user-selected parameters may be
displayed on this screen for quick-access monitoring while running. These parameters may be accessed
and enabled for display by placing a check in the box next to the item listed at Program ⇒ Monitor Setup
⇒ Scrolling Monitor Select. If no parameters are enabled for display, No Items is displayed.
When more than two items are selected for display the items are scrolled automatically. The display time
for each selected item may be set from 1 to 60 seconds. The parameters that may be displayed on the
Scrolling Monitor are listed in the section titled Monitor Mode on pg. 45.
44 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Panel Menu
The Panel menu may be accessed in either of two ways: while operating using the LED Keypad Option
the Panel menu may be accessed via F008 or if operating in the Local mode using the LCD EOI, press
ESC from the Frequency Command screen.
The control settings of the Panel menu are effective for LED keypad control only if accessed via Direct
Access method F008 and are effective for the LCD EOI control only if accessed via the Frequency
Command screen. Changes made to either of the Panel menus are not carried over to the other Panel
menu.
Using either method provides quick access to the following Panel menu parameters:
Direction — Forward or Reverse (see F008 for further information on this setting).
Stop Pattern — The Decel Stop or Coast Stop settings determines the method used to stop the motor
when using the Stop|Reset key of the EOI. The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking
system setup at F304 or the DC Injection Braking system setup at F250, F251, and F252. The Coast
Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load.
Note: The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of F603.
V/f Group — 1 of 4 V/f profiles may be selected and run. Each V/f profile is comprised of 4 user
settings: Base Frequency, Base Frequency Voltage, Manual Torque Boost, and Electronic
Thermal Protection. Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled
Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 59.
Accel/Decel Group — 1 of 4 Accel/Decel profiles may be selected and run. Each of the Accel/Decel
profiles is comprised of 3 user settings: Acceleration, Deceleration, and Pattern. Expanded
descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter
Information on pg. 59 (or see F009).
Feedback in Panel Mode — This feature enables or disables the PID feedback function.
Torque Limit Group — This parameter is used to select 1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply
to the active motor (of a multiple motor configuration). The settings of profiles 1 – 4 may be setup at
F441, F444, F446, and F448, respectively.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 45
Monitor Mode
The Monitor mode allows the user to monitor motor performance variables, control settings, and
configuration data during motor operation. There are 46 items that may be monitored from this mode. The
items are listed and described below.
Note: The Monitor mode is a read-only mode. The settings cannot be changed from the
Monitor mode. For information on how to change the values, see the section titled
Default Setting Changes on pg. 39.
Running Frequency — Displays the G7 Output Frequency.
Frequency Reference — Displays the Frequency Setpoint.
Output Current — Displays the Output Current as a percentage of the rated capacity of the G7.
Bus Voltage — Displays the Bus Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the G7.
Output Voltage — Displays the Output Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the G7.
Input Signal Status — Displays the status of the discrete input lines of the Control Terminal Strip.
Out1 Out2 FL — Displays the status of the discrete output lines of the Control Terminal Strip.
Timer — Displays the Cumulative Run Time in hours.
Postcomp Frequency — Displays the Output Frequency after the application of the slip
compensation correction value.
Feedback (inst.) — Provides a status of the Real Time Feedback in Hz.
Feedback (1 second) — Provides a status of the 1-Second Averaging feedback in Hz.
Torque — Displays the Output Torque as a percentage of the rated capacity of the G7.
Torque Reference — Displays the Torque Reference as a percentage.
Torque Current — Displays the current being used to produce torque.
Excitation Current — Displays the current required to produce the excitation field.
PID Value — Displays the PID feedback value in Hz (Proportional-Integral-Derivative).
Motor Overload — Displays the Motor Overload value as a percentage of the rated capacity of the
motor.
ASD Overload — Displays the ASD Overload as a percentage of the rated capacity of the G7.
DBR Overload — Displays the DBR Overload value as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking
Resistor capacity.
Motor Load — Displays the Motor Load in real time as a percentage of the rated capacity of the
motor.
ASD Load — Displays the ASD Load as a percentage of the rated capacity of the G7.
DBR Load — Displays the DBR Load as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity.
Input Power — Displays the Input Power in Kilowatts (Kw).
Output Power — Displays the Output Power in Kilowatts (Kw).
Peak Current — Displays the Peak Current since the last start was initiated. The current is
displayed as a percentage of the rated capacity of the G7.
Peak Voltage — Displays the Peak Voltage since the last start was initiated. The voltage is displayed
as a percentage of the rated capacity of the G7.
PG Speed — Displays the PG Speed.
Direction — Displays the Direction command (forward/reverse).
46 G7 ASD Operation Manual
PG Position — Displays the Pulse Generator Position.
RR — Displays the RR input value as a percentage of the full range of the RR value (potentiometer
input).
*VI/II — Displays the VI/II input setting as a percentage of the full range of the VI/II value.
Note: * The VI/II input represents two analog inputs (and terminals). The VI input
terminal is used for a 0 – 10 VDC analog signal and the II input terminal is used
for current loop applications, such as with a 4-20 mA signal. Either may be used
as a frequency or torque command source; however, the two cannot function
simultaneously. Throughout this manual they will be listed as VI/II.
RX — Displays the RX input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX value (-10 to
+10 VDC input).
RX2 — Displays the RX2 input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX2 value.
Note: The RX2 function is available on the ASD-Multicom option board only.
FM — Displays the output frequency value as a percentage of the full range of the FM value.
AM — Displays the output current as a percentage of the full range of the AM value.
Option Type — Displays the type form number of the installed ASD-Multicom option board.
Option Term A — TBD.
Option Term B — TBD.
Option Term O — TBD.
Option Term P — TBD.
Max. Output — TBD.
Pattern Select — Active Group Number and Speed Number separated by a period (e.g., 2.3).
Repeats Left — Number of remaining Speed cycles in the active Group.
Pattern — Active Speed Number of the Group.
Pattern Time Left — Time remaining in the active Speed.
Fault Status — Displays the current fault or No Fault.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 47
Program Mode
Table 6 lists the menu items of the Program mode and maps the flow of the menu selections. The
Parameter Numbers for the listed functions are provided where applicable. The functions listed may be
accessed (and changed) as mapped below or via the Direct Access method: Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒
Applicable Parameter Number.
Table 6. Program mode mapping.
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
FUNDAMENTAL
PARAMETERS Frequency Setting
Maximum Frequency F011
Upper Limit F012
Lower Limit F013
V/f Pattern F015
Standard Mode Selection
Command Mode F003
Frequency Mode #1 F004
Frequency Mode #2 F207
Reference Priority Selection F200
Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency F208
Accel/Decel #1 Settings
Accel #1 F009
Decel #1 F010
Accel/Decel Pattern F502
Automatic Accel/Decel Enable/Disable F000
Motor Set #1
#1 Base Frequency F014
#1 Max Output Voltage F306
#1 Torque Boost F016
#1 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F600
STARTUP WIZARD (See the section titled Startup Wizard Requirements on pg. 40.) N/A
CHANGED FROM
DEFAULT (See the section titled Default Setting Changes on pg. 39.) N/A
DIRECT ACCESS (See the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 59.) N/A
EOI OPTION SETUPS Contrast (adjustment) Darker (highlight Darker and press Enter)N/A
Lighter (highlight Lighter and press Enter)N/A
Local/Remote Key Command N/A
Frequency N/A
Realtime Clock Setup Date and time setting (requires RTC option) N/A
Preferences
Double Click Speed N/A
Arrow Speed N/A
Encoder Speed N/A
Encoder Action N/A
Alarm Popups Overheat Alarm N/A
Undervoltage Alarm N/A
48 G7 ASD Operation Manual
EOI OPTION SETUPS
Alarm Popups
Over-current Alarm N/A
ASD Overload Alarm N/A
Motor Overload Alarm N/A
Timer N/A
Overtorque Alarm N/A
DBR Resistor Alarm N/A
Lockout
Lockout Reset N/A
Lockout Monitor N/A
Lockout Run/Stop N/A
Lockout Parameter Access N/A
Lockout Parameter Write N/A
Lockout Frequency Change N/A
Lockout Options N/A
Lockout Local/Remote N/A
Password (Enable/Enter) N/A
Review Startup Screen (displays the Startup screen) N/A
UTILITY PARAMETERS
Versions (read only)
Typeform N/A
CPU Version N/A
CPU Revision N/A
EEPROM #1 Version N/A
EEPROM #2 Version N/A
EOI Version N/A
Display Units
User-defined Units Enable/Disable N/A
User-defined Units N/A
Hz Per User-defined Unit F702
Frequency Display Resolution F703
Units for Voltage and Current F701
Type Reset
None
F007
Auto Setup for 50 Hz
Auto Setup for 60 Hz
Restore Factory Defaults
Clear Trip
Clear Run Timer
New Base Drive Board
Save User Parameters
Restore User Parameters
Reload EOI Flash
Reset EOI Memory
Comm. Stops During Reset
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
G7 ASD Operation Manual 49
TERMINAL SELECTION
PARAMETERS
Input Terminal Function
FF111
RF112
ST F113
RES F114
S1 F115
S2 F116
S3 F117
S4 F118
S5 F119
S6 F120
S7 F121
12 F122
13 F123
14 F124
15 F125
16 F126
ON F110
Output Terminal
Functions
Out 1 F130
Out 2 F131
FL F132
4F133
5F134
6F135
7F136
Analog Input Functions
Acc/Dec Base Frequency Adjustment F650
Upper-limit Frequency Adjustment F651
Acceleration Time Adjustment F652
Deceleration Time Adjustment F653
Torque Boost Adjustment F654
Reach Settings Low Speed Signal Output Frequency F100
Speed Reach Setting Frequency F101
FP Terminal Settings FP Terminal Meter Selection F676
FP Terminal Meter Adjustment F677
Input Special Functions
ST Signal Selection F103
F/R Priority Selection (w/both on) F105
Input Terminal Priority F106
Extended Terminal Function F107
Line Power Switching (Commercial Power Switching) On Trip
Enable/Disable F354
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
50 G7 ASD Operation Manual
TERMINAL SELECTION
PARAMETERS
Line Power Switching
Switching-Frequency Setting and Enable/
Disable F355
ASD-Output Switching Wait-Time F356
Commercial Input-Power Wait-Time F357
Commercial-Power Switching-Frequency
Hold-Time F358
Input Terminal Delays
FF140
RF141
ST F142
RES F143
S1-S4 F144
S5-S16 F145
Output Terminal Delays
Out1 On Delay F150
Out1 Off Delay F160
Out2 On Delay F151
Out2 Off Delay F161
FL On Delay F152
FL Off Delay F162
Out4 On Delay F153
Out4 Off Delay F163
Out5 On Delay F154
Out5 Off Delay F164
Out6 On Delay F155
Out6 Off Delay F165
Out7 On Delay F156
Out7 Off Delay F166
FREQUENCY SETTING
PARAMETERS
Analog Filter Analog Input Filter Selection F209
Speed Ref. Setpoint
VI/II F201
RR F210
RX F216
RX2 F222
BIN F228
PG F234
Jog Settings
Jog Run Frequency F260
Jog Stop Control F261
Jog Window Enable/Disable N/A
Preset Speeds
#1 Frequency & Characteristics F018
#2 Frequency & Characteristics F019
#3 Frequency & Characteristics F020
#4 Frequency & Characteristics F021
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
G7 ASD Operation Manual 51
FREQUENCY SETTING
PARAMETERS
Preset Speeds
#5 Frequency & Characteristics F022
#6 Frequency & Characteristics F023
#7 Frequency & Characteristics F024
#8 Frequency & Characteristics F287
#9 Frequency & Characteristics F288
#10 Frequency & Characteristics F289
#11 Frequency & Characteristics F290
#12 Frequency & Characteristics F291
#13 Frequency & Characteristics F292
#14 Frequency & Characteristics F293
#15 Frequency & Characteristics F294
Preset Speed Mode Use Preset Speed Enable/Disable F380
Fwd/Rev Disable Disable Forward Run/Disable Reverse Run F311
Motorized Pot Settings
Motorized Pot Setting Disposition at Power
Down F108
Minimum Frequency N/A
Maximum Frequency N/A
PROTECTION
PARAMETERS
Dynamic Braking Dynamic Braking Enable/Disable &
Configuration F304
Stall
Over-current Stall Level F601
Over-voltage Stall Enable/Disable F305
Over-voltage Stall Level Configuration N/A
Over-voltage Stall Level (Fast) F625
Continuing Stall Period (During Positive
Torque/Speed) F452
Stall Prevention During Regeneration F454
DC (Injection) Braking
Start Frequency F250
DC Braking Current F251
DC Braking Time F252
Motor Shaft Fixing Control F253
Motor Shaft Stationary Control Enable/Disable F254
Emergency Off Settings
Emergency Off Mode Configuration F603
DC Injection Braking Time F604
Emergency Off Activation of the FL Output
Enable/Disable N/A
Retry/Restart
Configuration
Number of Retries F303
Restart Conditions F301
Scan Rate F312
Lock-on Rate F313
Search Method F314
Search Inertia F315
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
52 G7 ASD Operation Manual
PROTECTION
PARAMETERS Undervoltage/
Ridethrough
Ridethrough Mode F302
Ridethrough Time F310
Undervoltage Stall Level F629
Undervoltage Trip Enable/Disable F627
Undervoltage Detection Time F628
Overload
OL Reduction Starting Frequency F606
Motor 150% OL Time Limit F607
Soft Stall Enable/Disable F017
Motor Overload Trip Enable/Disable N/A
V/f Motor Enable/Disable N/A
Trip Settings Trip Save at Power Down Enable/Disable F602
Cooling Fan Control Cooling Fan Control Mode F620
Cumulative Run Timer Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting F621
Phase Loss Output Phase Loss Detection Enable/Disable F605
Low Current Settings Low Current Trip/Alarm Configuration F610
Abnormal Speed Settings
Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time F622
Overspeed Detection Frequency Range F623
Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range F624
Short Circuit Detect Pulse Short-Circuit-Pulse Run Command F613
Short-Circuit-Pulse Run Duration F614
Overtorque Settings
Overtorque Trip Enable/Disable F615
Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level During Power
Operation F616
Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level During
Regeneration F617
Overtorque Detection Time F618
Brake Fault Timer Braking Trouble Internal Timer F630
Release After Run Timer F632
Base Frequency Voltage Supply Voltage Compensation Enable/Disable F307
Output Voltage Limitation Enable/Disable
Soft Start Suppression of Inrush-Current Timing F609
Interlock with ST
TORQUE SETTING
PARAMETERS Set Points
VI/II F205
RR F214
RX F220
Set Points RX2 F226
BIN F232
Torque Control
Torque Command Selection F420
Torque Command Filter F421
Synchronized Torque Bias Input Selection F422
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
G7 ASD Operation Manual 53
TORQUE SETTING
PARAMETERS Torque Control Tension Torque Bias Input Selection F423
Load Sharing Gain Input Selection F424
Torque Limit Settings
Positive Torque Limit #1Selection F440
Negative Torque Limit #1Selection F442
Manual Settings F441
Torque Limit Mode F450
Torque Limit Mode (speed dependent) F451
Manual Torque Limit
Settings
#1 Positive/Negative Torque Limit Settings F441
#2 Positive/Negative Torque Limit Settings F444
#3 Positive/Negative Torque Limit Settings F446
#4 Positive/Negative Torque Limit Settings F448
Torque Speed Limiting
Torque Command Mode Selection F429
Forward Speed Limit Selection F425
Forward Speed Limit Level F426
Reverse Speed Limit Selection F427
Reverse Speed Limit Level F428
Speed Limit Torque Reference Selection F430
Speed Limit Torque Level F431
Speed Limit Torque Band F432
Speed Limit Torque Recovery Time F433
FEEDBACK
PARAMETERS
Feedback Settings
Input Selection F360
Proportional (P) Gain F362
Integral (I) Gain F363
Differential (D) Gain F366
Delay Filter F361
Deviation Limits F364
Position Difference Limit F631
PG Settings
Number of PG Input Pulses F367
PG Input Phases F368
PG Disconnection Detection Selection F369
Electronic Gear Setting F370
Position Loop Gain F371
Positioning Completion Range F372
Frequency Limit at Position F373
Current Control Proportional Gain F374
Current Control Integral Gain F375
Speed Loop Proportional Gain F376
Speed Loop Integral Gain F377
Motor Counter Data Selection F378
Speed Loop Parameter Ratio F379
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
54 G7 ASD Operation Manual
FEEDBACK
PARAMETERS
Drooping Control
Drooping Gain 100% F320
Speed at Drooping Gain 0% F321
Speed at Drooping Gain 100% F322
Drooping Insensitive Torque Band F323
Drooping Output Filter F324
Drooping Reference F327
Load Inertia (Acc/Dec Torque) F325
Load Torque Filter F326
Override Control
Adding Input Selection F660
Multiplying Input Selection F661
LED Option Override Multiplication Gain F729
PATTERN RUN
CONTROL PARAMETERS
Pattern Run Pattern Run Mode Enable/Disable and Restart
Configuration F520
Speeds
Pattern #1 Speeds F530
Pattern #2 Speeds F540
Pattern #3 Speeds F550
Pattern #4 Speeds F560
Preset Speeds
#1 Frequency & Characteristics F018
#2 Frequency & Characteristics F019
#3 Frequency & Characteristics F020
#4 Frequency & Characteristics F021
#5 Frequency & Characteristics F022
#6 Frequency & Characteristics F023
#7 Frequency & Characteristics F024
#8 Frequency & Characteristics F287
#9 Frequency & Characteristics F288
#10 Frequency & Characteristics F289
#11 Frequency & Characteristics F290
#12 Frequency & Characteristics F291
#13 Frequency & Characteristics F292
#14 Frequency & Characteristics F293
#15 Frequency & Characteristics F294
Preset Speed Mode Use Preset Speed Enable/Disable F380
COMMUNICATION
SETTING PARAMETERS
Communication Settings
ASD Number F802
Logic (TTL) Baud Rate F800
RS232/RS485 Baud Rate F820
Parity F801
RS232/RS485 Communication Time Out Time F803
Logic (TTL) Communication Time Out Action F804
RS232/RS485 Communication Time Out
Action N/A
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
G7 ASD Operation Manual 55
COMMUNICATION
SETTING PARAMETERS
Communication Settings
Communication Interval (logic) F805
RS232/RS485 Wire Count F821
RS232/RS485 Response Time F825
TTL Master Output Selection F806
RS232/RS485 Master Output Selection F826
LCD Port Connection Type N/A
Communication
Reference Adjust Frequency Point Selection F810
S20 Settings
Receive Address F860
Transmit Address F861
Speed Reference Station F862
Speed Reference Address F863
Torque Reference Station F865
Torque Reference Address F866
Fault Detect Station Number F868
Station Mode F869
S20 Reset F899
Error Mode F850
Error Detect Time F851
Scan Receive Settings
#1 Scan Receive F831
#2 Scan Receive F832
#3 Scan Receive F833
#4 Scan Receive F834
#5 Scan Receive F835
#6 Scan Receive F836
Scan Transmit Settings
#1 Scan Transmit F841
#2 Scan Transmit F842
#3 Scan Transmit F843
#4 Scan Transmit F844
#5 Scan Transmit F845
#6 Scan Transmit F846
Communication Error Command Request Disposition on Error F830
Optional Parameters
Optional Parameter #1 F890
Optional Parameter #2 F891
Optional Parameter #3 F892
Optional Parameter #4 F893
Optional Parameter #5 F894
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
56 G7 ASD Operation Manual
METER TERMINAL
ADJUSTMENT
PARAMETERS
FM FM Terminal Assignment F005
FM Terminal Adjustment F006
AM AM Terminal Assignment F670
AM Terminal Adjustment F671
Analog1 Analog 1 Terminal Assignment F672
Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment F673
Analog2 Analog 2 Terminal Assignment F674
Analog 2 Terminal AdjustmentF675
MOTOR PARAMETERS
Vector Motor Model
AutoTune Enable/Disable and Reset Config. F400
AutoTune Enable/Disable of Motor Constant 3 F414
Slip Frequency Gain F401
Motor Constant 1 (primary resistance) F402
Motor Constant 2 (secondary resistance) F403
Motor Constant 3 (exciting inductance) F404
Motor Constant 4 (load inertia) F405
Motor Constant 5 (leakage inductance) F410
Motor Settings
Number of Motor Poles F411
Motor Capacity (kW) F412
Motor Type F413
Motor Set #1
#1 Base Frequency F014
#1 Max Output Voltage F306
#1 Torque Boost F016
#1 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F600
Motor Set #2
#2 Base Frequency F170
#2 Max Output Voltage F171
#2 Torque Boost F172
#2 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F173
Motor Set #3
#3 Base Frequency F174
#3 Max Output Voltage F175
#3 Torque Boost F176
#3 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F177
Motor Set #4
#4 Base Frequency F178
#4 Max Output Voltage F179
#4 Torque Boost F180
#4 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F181
MONITOR SETUP Trip History Trip History Records N/A
Trip Monitor from ASD
Most Recent N/A
Second Most Recent N/A
Third Most Recent N/A
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
G7 ASD Operation Manual 57
MONITOR SETUP Trip Monitor from ASD Fourth Most Recent N/A
Scrolling Monitor Select Scrolling Monitor Select N/A
SPECIAL CONTROL
PARAMETERS Frequency Control
Start Frequency F240
End Frequency F243
Run Frequency F241
Run Frequency Hysteresis F242
Jump Frequencies Jump Frequency Bandwidth Settings F271
Jump Frequency Processing Selection F276
Carrier Frequency PWM Carrier Frequency Setting F300
Accel/Decel #1 – #4
Settings
Accel/Decel/Pattern #1 Configuration F009
Accel/Decel/Pattern #2 Configuration F500
Accel/Decel/Pattern #3 Configuration F510
Accel/Decel/Pattern #4 Configuration F514
Accel/Decel Special
S-Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment F506
S-Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment F507
Accel/Decel Time Lower Limit F508
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #1 F505
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #2 F513
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #3 F517
Display Resolution F704
Crane/Hoist Load
High-Speed Operation at Light Load F330
Light-load High-speed Operation Switching
Lower Limit Frequency F331
Light-load High-speed Operation Load
Waiting Time F332
Light-load High-speed Operation Load
Detection Time F333
Light-load High-speed Operation Heavy Load
Detection Time F334
Switching Load Torque During Forward Run F335
Heavy Load Torque During Acceleration in
the Forward Direction F336
Heavy Load Torque During Deceleration in
the Forward Direction F337
Switching Load Torque During Reverse Run F338
Heavy Load Torque During Acceleration in
the Reverse Direction F339
Heavy Load Torque During Deceleration in
the Reverse Direction F340
Frequency for Automatic High-speed
Operation at Light Load F341
Backlash Setup Not available at the time of this release. N/A
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
58 G7 ASD Operation Manual
SPECIAL CONTROL
PARAMETERS
V/f Five Point Setting
#1 Frequency Setting F190
#1 Voltage Setting F191
#2 Frequency Setting F192
#2 Voltage Setting F193
#3 Frequency Setting F194
#3 Voltage Setting F195
#4 Frequency Setting F196
#4 Voltage Setting F197
#5 Frequency Setting F198
#5 Voltage Setting F199
Low Output Disable
Function
LOD Control and Stopping Method F731
LOD Start Level F732
LOD Start Time F733
LOD Setpoint Boost F734
LOD Boost Time F735
LOD Feedback Level F736
LOD Restart Delay Time F737
Earth Fault
Earth Fault Alarm Level F640
Earth Fault Alarm Time F641
Earth Fault Trip Level F642
Earth Fault Trip Time F643
Special Parameters
V/f Adjustment Coefficient F183
0 Hz Dead Band Frequency Setting Signal F244
0 Hz Command Stop Function F255
Over Exciting Cooperation F481
Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening
Zone F485
Exciting Starting Rate N/A
Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss F487
Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead
Time N/A
Dead Time Compensation Enable/Disable F489
Dead Time Compensation Bias F490
Switching Frequency Between Current and
Voltage F491
Optional Analog Terminal Mark N/A
Current Differential Gain F454
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient F480
Enable/Disable User Parameter Initialization
During Typeform Initialization F709
% Current Vector Control F482
% Voltage Vector Control F483
% Constant Vector Control F484
Program Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
G7 ASD Operation Manual 59
Direct Access Parameter Information
The G7 ASD has the ability to allow the user direct access to the motor control functions. The functions
listed below have an associated Parameter Number which accesses its setting. There are two ways in
which the motor-control parameters may be accessed for modification: Program ⇒ applicable menu path
or Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ applicable parameter number. Both methods access the parameter via
the Program mode. Once accessed, the parameter may be viewed or changed.
The Program mode allows the user to develop an application-specific motor control profile. Motor
control functions may be set to accommodate specific power and timing requirements for a given
application. The configurable parameters of the Program mode that have user-accessible Parameter
Numbers are listed and described below.
Note: The setup procedures included within this section may require a Reset before performing the
procedure. Application-specific settings may then be performed. The pre-Reset conditions may be
saved (see F007).
Direct Access Parameters/Numbers
Automatic Accel/Decel #1
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the ability of the ASD to adjust the
acceleration and deceleration rates in accordance with the applied load
automatically.
The adjusted acceleration and deceleration times range from 12.5% to 800% of
the programmed values for Acceleration Time #1 (F009) and Deceleration
Time #1 (F010).
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Note: The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting
Automatic Accel/Decel.
Direct Access Number — F000
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Command Mode Selection
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Command Mode
The Command Mode Selection establishes the source of the command input
for the ASD. Command inputs include Run, Stop, Forward, etc. The
Override feature may supersede the Command Mode Selection setting (see
Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg. 31).
Settings:
Use Control Terminal Strip
Use LED Keypad Option
Use Common Serial (TTL)
Use RS232/RS485
Use Communication Card
Direct Access Number — F003
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Use Control
Terminal Strip
Changeable During Run — No
F000 F003
60 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Frequency Mode #1
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Frequency Mode #1
The Frequency Mode #1 setting establishes the source of the frequency-control
input for the ASD. The Override feature may supersede the Frequency
Mode #1 setting (see Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg. 31).
Note: Only Bolded items from the Settings list below may be placed in
the Override mode. See the section titled Command Mode and
Frequency Mode Control on pg. 31 for further information on the
Override feature.
Settings:
Use VI/II
Use RR
Use RX
Use Option Card RX2
Use LED Keypad Option
Use Binary/BCD Input
Use Common Serial (TTL)
Use RS232/RS485
Use Communication Card
Use Motorized Pot. Simulation
Use Pulse Input Option
Direct Access Number — F004
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Use RR
Changeable During Run — No
FM Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ FM
This setting determines the output function of the FM analog output terminal.
The FM output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the
magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments
for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 61.
Note: To read voltage at this terminal a 100 – 500Ω resistor is
required and it must be connected from FM (+) to FM (-). The
voltage is read across the 100 – 500Ω resistor.
Current may be read by connecting an ammeter from FM (+) to
FM (-).
The FM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1/1024. The FM Terminal
Adjustment (F006) must be used to calibrate the output signal for a proper
response. SW-2 may be switched to allow for the full-range output to be either
0 – 1 mA or 4 – 20 mA when providing an output current, or either 0 – 1 or 1 –
7.5 volts when providing an output voltage at this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F005
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
FM Terminal Adjustment
Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ FM
This function is used to calibrate the FM analog output terminal.
To calibrate the FM analog output, connect a meter (current or voltage) as
described at F005. With the drive running at a known frequency, adjust this
parameter (F006) until the running frequency produces the desired DC level
output at the FM terminal.
Direct Access Number — F006
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 1280
F004 F006
G7 ASD Operation Manual 61
The magnitude of the AM/FM output signal at full-scale is selection-specific and may be
adjusted (see F671 and F006) to fit application-specific requirements. Table 7 shows the default
full-scale output setting of the AM/FM terminal for each selection. The column on the right side
of Table 7 shows the actual AM/FM output for an EOI display of 100% (default setting).
Table 7. Output terminal selections for the AM, FM, FP, and Analog 1&2 terminals.
Function AM/FM Output Value at
100% EOI-Displayed Output
Output Frequency (FM and FP default setting) Maximum Frequency
Frequency Reference
Output Current (AM default setting)
150%
DC Bus Voltage
Output Voltage (Analog 1 default setting)
Post-compensation Frequency (Analog 2 default setting)
Maximum Frequency
Speed Feedback (realtime)
Speed Feedback (1 sec filter)
Torque
150%
Torque Command
Internal Torque Base
Torque Current
Excitation Current
PID Feedback Value Maximum Frequency
Motor Overload Ratio Motor Overload Trip Point Setting
ASD Overload Ratio ASD Overload Trip Point Setting
PBR (DBR) Overload Ratio DBR Overload Trip Point Setting
PBR (DBR) Load Ratio Maximum DBR Duty Cycle
Input Power 1.73 * input voltage * ASD rated current
Output Power
Peak Output Current 150%
Peak DC Bus Voltage
PG Counter 32767 Encoder Pulses
Position Pulse
RR Input
100%
VI/II Input
RX Input
RX2 Input
FM Output (used for factory testing only)
AM Output (used for factory testing only)
Meter Adjust Value
Analog Output
Load Torque 150%
62 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Type Reset
Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒ Type Reset
This feature assists the user when performing fault analysis or by
allowing a quick system setup change when required. Performing a
Type Reset results in one of the following user-selected post-reset
configurations.
Settings:
None
Auto Setup for 50 Hz
Auto Setup for 60 Hz
Restore Factory Defaults
Clear Trip
Clear Run Timer
New Base Drive Board
*Save User Parameters
Restore User Parameters
Reload EOI Flash
Reset EOI Memory
Note: *User settings that are stored in the memory of the EOI are not
saved via the Save User Parameters selection. The unsaved
functions include the EOI Option Setups, (Utility Parameters
⇒) Display Units, and (Monitor Setup ⇒) Scrolling Monitor
Select.
Direct Access Number — F007
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — No
Direction (of motor rotation)
No path available (Direct Access Only)
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter sets the
direction of motor rotation. This setting may be changed during operation. This
setting will not override parameter F311 (Forward/Reverse Disable).
If either direction is disabled via parameter F311, the disabled direction will not
be recognized if commanded by the LED Keypad. If both directions are
disabled via parameter F311, the direction command from the LED Keypad
will determine the direction of the motor rotation.
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Note: If using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the Frequency
Command screen to access the Motor Direction parameter.
Direct Access Number — F008
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — Yes
Reset
F007 F008
G7 ASD Operation Manual 63
Accel #1 Time
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0.0 Hz to
the Maximum Frequency for the #1 Acceleration profile. The accel/decel
pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using
F508.
Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the
acceleration time.
Acceleration
The acceleration rate of a motor is determined by several factors: applied
power, applied load, and the physical properties of the motor (winding
parameters, motor size, etc.). The ASD will control the first of these factors:
input power. The settings of the ASD control the frequency and amplitude of
the applied voltage to the motor.
Under most operating conditions, as the output frequency of the drive goes up
so does the output voltage (linear acceleration). The ASD has the ability to
modify the relationship between frequency and voltage automatically to
produce smoother operation or increased (starting) torque.
Direct Access Number — F009
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Decel #1 Time
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the
Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #1 Deceleration profile. The accel/
decel pattern may be set using F502.
When operating with the Automatic Accel/Decel enabled (F000) the minimum
accel/decel time may be set using F508.
Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the
acceleration time.
Direct Access Number — F010
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Maximum Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Frequency Settings
This setting determines the absolute maximum frequency that the ASD can
output. This setting is also referred to as FH.
Accel/decel times are calculated based on the Maximum Frequency setting.
Note: This setting may not be lower than the Upper Limit setting
(F012).
Direct Access Number — F011
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 30.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
Upper Limit Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Frequency Settings
This parameter sets the highest frequency that the ASD will accept as a
frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD may output frequencies
higher than the Upper Limit Frequency (but, lower than the Maximum
Frequency) when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode,
or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Note: This setting may not be higher than the Maximum Frequency
(F011) setting.
Direct Access Number — F012
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F009 F012
64 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Lower Limit Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Frequency Settings
This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the ASD will accept as a
frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD will output frequencies
lower than the Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or
decelerating to a stop. Frequencies below the Lower Limit may also be output
when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the
Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Direct Access Number — F013
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Motor #1 Base Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #1
The Base Frequency setting determines the frequency at which the output
voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The maximum voltage setting
cannot be more that the input voltage (see Maximum Output Voltage at
F306). There are four Base Frequency profile settings: #1 – #4.
Note: For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency is normally set
for the name-plated frequency of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F014
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
V/f Pattern
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Frequency Settings
This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the
output voltage.
Settings:
Constant Torque
Variable Torque
Automatic Torque Boost
Sensorless Vector Control (speed)
Auto Torque Boost with Automatic Energy Savings
Sensorless Vector Control (speed) with Automatic Energy Savings
V/f 5-Point Setting (opens 5-point setting screen)
Sensorless Vector Control (speed/torque switching)
PG Feedback Vector Control (speed/torque switching)
PG Feedback Vector Control (speed/position switching)
Note: For proper operation, the carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or
above except when operating in the Constant Torque, Variable
Torque, or the 5-Point Setting modes.
The Automatic Torque Boost and the Sensorless Vector Control selections
use the motor tuning parameters of the drive to properly configure the ASD for
the motor being used. If Load Reactors or Long Lead Filters are used, or if
the capacity of the ASD is greater than the motor, manual tuning of the motor
parameters may be required for optimum performance.
Direct Access Number — F015
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Constant Torque
Changeable During Run — No
F013 F015
G7 ASD Operation Manual 65
Motor #1 Torque Boost
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #1
The Motor #1 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency
torque for high-inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the #1 Base Frequency (F014) setting.
The value programmed as a boost percentage establishes an output voltage vs.
output frequency relationship to be used to start the motor or to provide
smoother operation.
Note: Setting an excessive Torque Boost level may cause nuisance
tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Direct Access Number — F016
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Soft Stall
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overload
This parameter Enables/Disables the Soft Stall function. When enabled, the
Soft Stall function reduces the output frequency of the ASD when the current
requirements of the motor exceed the Electronic Thermal Protection #1
setting (F600); thus, reducing the output current.
If the current drops below the motor overload protection level setting within a
specified time, the output of the ASD will accelerate to the programmed
frequency setpoint. If not, a trip will be incurred.
The Soft Stall feature is available when the (Program ⇒ Protection Parameters
⇒ Overload ⇒) Motor Overload Trip Enable/Disable parameter is enabled
only.
Soft Stall is highly effective in preventing motor overload trips when used on
fans, blowers, pumps, and other centrifugal loads which require less torque at
lower frequencies.
Note: The Soft Stall setting may affect acceleration times and patterns.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Direct Access Number — F017
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F016 F017
66 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Preset Speed #1
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 1
Up to 15 output frequency values that fall within the Lower Limit and the
Upper Limit range may be programmed into the drive and output as a Preset
Speed. This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0001 and
is identified as Preset Speed #1. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed.
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Preset Speed
control input at the S1 – S4 terminals:
1. Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Use
Control Terminal Strip.
2. Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminals ⇒ S1 (set to
Preset Speed Command 1; LSB of 4-bit count). Repeat for S2 – S4 (MSB
of 4-bit count) as Preset Speed Command 2 – 4, respectively (all
Normally Open).
Note: The default setting of S4 is EOff, but this terminal may be re-
assigned as the MSB.
3. Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 1 (press
Enter twice and set an output frequency as Preset Speed #1; repeat for
Preset Speeds 2 – 15 as required).
4. Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Preset Speed Mode ⇒ Use
Speed Modes (Enable/Disable).
When Enabled, the direction, accel/decel, and torque settings of the
Preset Speed being run are used.
When Disabled, only the speed setting of the Preset Speed being run is
used.
5. Place the system in the Remote mode (Local|Remote LED Off).
6. Provide a Run command (connect F and/or R to CC).
Connect S1 to CC to run Preset Speed #1 (S1 to CC = 0001 binary).
With S1 – S4 configured to output Preset Speeds (F115 – F118), 0001 – 1111
may be applied to S1 – S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to run the associated
Preset Speed. If bidirectional operation is required, F and R must be connected
to CC, and Use Speed Modes must be enabled at F380.
With S1 being the least significant bit of a binary count, the S1 – S4 settings
will produce the programmed speed settings as indicated below.
Preset Speeds are also used in the Pattern Run mode.
Direct Access Number — F018
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #2
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 2
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0010 and is
identified as Preset Speed #2. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F019
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset S4
MSB S3 S2 S1
LSB Output
10001F018
20010F019
30011F020
40100 F021
50101F022
60110F023
70111 F024
81000 F287
91001F288
10 1010F289
11 1011F290
12 1100 F291
13 1101F292
14 1110F293
15 1111F294
Note: 1 = Terminal connected to CC.
F018 F019
G7 ASD Operation Manual 67
Preset Speed #3
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 3
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0011 and is
identified as Preset Speed #3. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F020
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #4
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 4
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0100 and is
identified as Preset Speed #4. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F021
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #5
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 5
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0101 and is
identified as Preset Speed #5. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F022
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #6
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 6
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0110 and is
identified as Preset Speed #6. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F023
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #7
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 7
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0111 and is
identified as Preset Speed #7. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F024
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Low Speed Signal Output Frequency
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Reach Settings
The Low Speed Signal Output Frequency parameter sets a frequency
threshold that activates the assigned output terminal so long as the ASD output
is at or above this setting (see Table 9 on pg. 81 for the available output
assignments).
Direct Access Number — F100
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F020 F100
68 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Speed Reach Frequency
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Reach Settings
The Speed Reach Frequency sets a frequency threshold that, when reached or
is within the bandwidth specified by parameter F102, will provide a signal at an
output terminal that can close an appropriately configured output contact (see
Table 9 on pg. 81 for the available output assignments).
Direct Access Number — F101
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Speed Reach Frequency Tolerance
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Reach Settings
This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Speed Reach Frequency (F101)
setting.
Direct Access Number — F102
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.5
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F101 F102
G7 ASD Operation Manual 69
ST Signal Selection
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Special Functions
This parameter is used to set the operation of the Standby (ST) control terminal
or any terminal configured as the ST terminal.
Settings:
ST-to-CC Required
ST-to-CC Not Required
Interlock with F/R Terminal
The setting ST-to-CC Required enables the ASD for operation so long as the
control terminal ST is connected to CC via a jumper, contact, or other means.
The ST-to-CC Not Required setting allows the ASD to operate without the
ST-to-CC connection. The control terminal ST may be configured for other
functions.
The Interlock with F/R Terminal setting configures the F (Forward) and R
(Reverse) control terminals for the secondary function of Standby. Closing a
set of contacts to either F or R will cause the ASD to accelerate the motor to the
programmed setpoint of F or R. Opening the F and R contact will disable the
ASD and the motor will coast to a stop. The control terminal ST may be
configured for other functions.
Direct Access Number — F103
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — ST – CC Required
Changeable During Run — No
R/F Priority Selection
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Special Functions
The R/F Priority Selection determines the operation of the ASD if both the R
and F control terminals are activated.
Settings:
Reverse
Suspend
The waveforms below depict the motor response for all combinations of the F
and R terminal settings if the Reverse option is chosen.
The Suspend setting will decelerate the motor to a stop regardless of the
rotation direction when both the F and R control terminals are activated.
Direct Access Number — F105
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reverse
Changeable During Run — No
F103 F105
70 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Input Terminal Priority
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Special Functions
This parameter is used to allow the Jog and DC Injection Braking input
signals to control the ASD when received via the Control Terminal Strip even
though the system is in the Local mode.
With this parameter enabled, a Jog command or a DC Injection Braking
command received from the Control Terminal Strip will receive priority over
commands from the EOI.
See F260 for further information on using the Jog function.
See F250 – F252 for further information on DC Injection Braking.
Settings:
Enabled (Box checked)
Disabled
Direct Access Number — F106
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Extended Terminal Function
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Special Functions
The Extended Terminal Function is used with the optional ASD-Multicom
card only. This parameter defines the format of the binary or BCD data when
using the option card.
Settings:
None
12-Bit Binary
16-Bit Binary
3-Digit BCD
4-Digit BCD
Reverse 12-Bit Binary
Reverse 16-Bit Binary
Reverse 3-Digit BCD
Reverse 4-Digit BCD
Selections using 16-bit binary or 4-digit BCD will require the configuration of
terminals S1-S4 on the Control Terminal Strip as binary bits 0 – 3 (F115 –
F118). The Frequency Mode #1 Selection (F004) must be set to Use Binary/
BCD Input.
For proper scaling of the binary or BCD input, parameters F228 – F231 must
be configured [BIN Reference Point #1, BIN Reference #1 (frequency), Bin
Reference Point #2, and BIN Reference #2 (frequency)].
Direct Access Number — F107
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — No
F106 F107
G7 ASD Operation Manual 71
Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Motorized Pot Settings
When the Frequency Mode #1 Selection (F004) setting is set to Use MOP
Function Simulation, this parameter determines the outcome of the Frequency
Mode #1 setting at powerdown or stop.
Settings:
Erase
Store
If Erase is selected, the ASD will not store the frequency setpoint and
establishes a setpoint of 0.0 Hz when restarted.
If Store is selected, the ASD will maintain the current frequency setpoint in
memory while stopped, during fault conditions, or when power is removed.
This setpoint will be used as the initial frequency setpoint when the ASD is
restarted.
A control terminal configured as MOP Frequency Clear will establish a
frequency setpoint of 0.0 Hz regardless of the Motorized Pot Frequency at
Power Down setting.
Direct Access Number — F108
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Erase
Changeable During Run — No
ON Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ ON
This parameter selects the functionality of the virtual input terminal ON. As a
virtual terminal, the ON control terminal exists only in memory and is
considered to always be in its True (or connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign this terminal to a function that the user desires to
be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable ON terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F110
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
F Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ F
This parameter selects the functionality of the F input terminal.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable F terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F111
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
R Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ R
This parameter selects the functionality of the R input terminal.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable R terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F112
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reverse
Changeable During Run — No
F108 F112
72 G7 ASD Operation Manual
ST Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ ST
This parameter selects the functionality of the ST input terminal.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable ST terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F113
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Standby
Changeable During Run — No
RES Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ RES
This parameter selects the functionality of the RES input terminal.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable RES terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F114
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reset
Changeable During Run — No
S1 Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ S1
This parameter selects the functionality of the S1 input terminal.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S1 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F115
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed Cmd #1
Changeable During Run — No
S2 Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ S2
This parameter selects the functionality of the S2 input terminal.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S2 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F116
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed Cmd #2
Changeable During Run — No
S3 Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ S3
This parameter selects the functionality of the S3 input terminal.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S3 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F117
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed Cmd #3
Changeable During Run — No
F113 F117
G7 ASD Operation Manual 73
S4 Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ S4
This parameter selects the functionality of the S4 input terminal.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S4 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F118
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Emergency Off
Changeable During Run — No
S5 Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ S5
This parameter selects the functionality of the S5 input terminal.
Note: The S5 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom
option board.
Without the ASD-Multicom option board the S5 terminal
assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The
terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is
powered down or reset.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S5 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F119
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
S6 Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ S6
This parameter selects the functionality of the S6 input terminal.
Note: The S6 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom
option board.
Without the ASD-Multicom option board the S6 terminal
assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The
terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is
powered down or reset.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S6 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F120
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
F118 F120
74 G7 ASD Operation Manual
S7 Input Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ S7
This parameter selects the functionality of the S7 input terminal.
Note: The S7 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom
option board.
Without the ASD-Multicom option board the S7 terminal
assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The
terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is
powered down or reset.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S7 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F121
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 12 Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ 12
This parameter selects the functionality of the #12 input terminal.
Note: The #12 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom
option board.
Without the ASD-Multicom option board the #12 terminal
assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The
terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is
powered down or reset.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable terminal #12 to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F122
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 13 Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ 13
This parameter selects the functionality of the #13 input terminal.
Note: The #13 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom
option board.
Without the ASD-Multicom option board the #13 terminal
assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The
terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is
powered down or reset.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable terminal #13 to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F123
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
F121 F123
G7 ASD Operation Manual 75
Input Terminal 14 Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ 14
This parameter selects the functionality of the #14 input terminal.
Note: The #14 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom
option board.
Without the ASD-Multicom option board the #14 terminal
assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The
terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is
powered down or reset.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable terminal #14 to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F124
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 15 Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ 15
This parameter selects the functionality of the #15 input terminal.
Note: The #15 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom
option board.
Without the ASD-Multicom option board the #15 terminal
assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The
terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is
powered down or reset.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable terminal #15 to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F125
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 16 Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal
Assignment ⇒ 16
This parameter selects the functionality of the #16 input terminal.
Note: The #16 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom
option board.
Without the ASD-Multicom option board the #16 terminal
assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The
terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is
powered down or reset.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable terminal #16 to 1 of the 68 possible
functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 76.
Direct Access Number — F126
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
F124 F126
76 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Table 8 . Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions.
0 — Unassigned — No operation.
1 — F — Enables Forward operation commands.
2 — R — Enables Reverse operation commands.
3 — ST — Enables the Forward and Reverse operation commands (maybe disabled at F103).
4 — RES — Resets the device and any incurred faults.
5 — S1 —Preset Speed Command 1 is used as the LSB of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
6 — S2 — Preset Speed Command 2 is used as the second bit of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
7 — S3 — Preset Speed Command 3 is used as the third bit of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
8 — S4 — Preset Speed Command 4 is used as the MSB of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
9 — Jog — Jog is the term used to describe turning on the motor for small increments of time and is used when precise
positioning of motor-driven equipment is required. This terminal activates a Jog for the duration of activation. The Jog
settings may be configured at F260 and F261.
10 — Emergency Off — Terminates the output signal from the drive and may apply a brake. The braking method may be
selected at F603.
11 — DC Braking — The drive outputs a DC current that is injected into the windings of the motor to quickly brake the motor.
12 — Accel/Decel 1, 2 Switching — Acceleration and Deceleration control may be switched between the #1 profile to the #2
profile if using a multiple-accel/decel profile configuration.
13 — Accel/Decel 3, 4 Switching — Acceleration and Deceleration control may be switched between the #3 profile to the #4
profile if using a multiple-accel/decel profile configuration.
14 — Motor 1, 2 Switching — Motor control may be switched between the Motor #1 profile to the Motor #2 profile if using
a multiple-motor profile configuration.
15 — Motor 3, 4 Switching — Motor control may be switched between the Motor #3 profile to the Motor #4 profile if using
a multiple-motor profile configuration.
16 — Torque Limit 1, 2 Switching — Torque control may be switched between the Torque Limit #1 profile to the Torque
Limit #2 profile if using a multiple-profile configuration.
17 — Torque Limit 3, 4 Switching — Torque control may be switched between the Torque Limit #3 profile to the Torque
Limit #4 profile if using a multiple-profile configuration.
18 — PID Control Off — Connecting this terminal to CC turns off PID control.
19 — Pattern #1 — Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern #1 Pattern Run.
20 — Pattern #2 — Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern #2 Pattern Run.
21 — Pattern #3 — Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern #3 Pattern Run.
22 — Pattern #4 — Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern #4 Pattern Run.
23 — Pattern Continue — Continues with the last Pattern Run from its stopping point when connected to CC.
24 — Pattern Trigger — This function is used to sequentially initiate each Preset Speed of a Pattern Run with each
connection to CC.
25 — Forced Jog Forward — This setting initiates a Forced Forward Jog when connected to CC. The Forced Forward Jog
command provides a forward-run signal so long as this terminal is connected to CC (the status of the F and R terminals
is ignored). Use F260 to set the Jog Frequency and use F261 to select the Jog Stop Method.
26 — Forced Jog Reverse — This setting initiates a Forced Reverse Jog when connected to CC. The Forced Reverse Jog
command provides a reverse-run signal so long as this terminal is connected to CC (the status of the F and R terminals is
ignored). Use F260 to set the Jog Frequency and use F261 to select the Jog Stop Method.
27 — Binary Bit 0 — Bit 0 – 7 may be set up as a speed/torque control register. Speed/torque settings may be applied to this
group of terminals in binary form. The required number of input terminals should be set to the respective binary bit
settings (0 – MSB). The Frequency Mode setting must be set to Use Binary/BCD input.
The gain and bias of the binary input may be set from the following path: Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒
Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ BIN (see F228).
G7 ASD Operation Manual 77
28 — Binary Bit 1 — See selection 27 above.
29 — Binary Bit 2 — See selection 27 above.
30 — Binary Bit 3 — See selection 27 above.
31 — Binary Bit 4 — See selection 27 above.
32 — Binary Bit 5 — See selection 27 above.
33 — Binary Bit 6 — See selection 27 above.
34 — Binary Bit 7 — See selection 27 above.
35 — Forced Stop — Activating this terminal terminates the Run command regardless of the Command Mode setting and
initiates the programmed stopping method.
36 — Stop Key Emulation — Activating this terminal terminates the Run command being received from communications
devices and initiates the programmed stopping method.
37 — Reserved — No operation.
38 — Reserved — No operation.
39 — Reserved — No operation.
40 — Reserved — No operation.
41 — Reserved — No operation.
42 — Reserved — No operation.
43 — Binary Data Write — This terminal serves two functions:
1) While operating in the Use Binary/BCD input mode, each momentary connection of this terminal to CC transfers the
speed/torque Binary Bit (0 – MSB) settings to the motor.
2) The Motorized Pot frequency command will be saved during power down or reset by setting F108 to Store and
setting an input terminal to 43:binary Data Write. If the drive is running and the Binary Data Write terminal is
active when an event occurs (Fault, Power off), the Motorized Pot frequency command will be restored upon power-
up or reset.
44 — Motorized Pot Up (MOP) — Momentarily connecting this terminal to CC causes an increase in motor speed for the
duration of the connection until the Upper Limit is reached. The Frequency Mode setting must be set to Motorized
Pot. Simulation. The MOP acceleration rate is determined by the F500 setting.
45 — Motorized Pot Down (MOP) — Momentarily connecting this terminal to CC causes a decrease in motor speed for the
duration of the connection until the Lower Limit is reached. The Frequency Mode setting must be set to Motorized
Pot. Simulation. The MOP deceleration rate is determined by the F501 setting.
46 — Motorized Pot Clear — Connecting this terminal to CC clears the last Motorized Pot frequency settings (see F108 for
further information on this setting).
47 — Momentary Push Run — When connected to CC this terminal setting starts the motor.
48 — Momentary Push Stop — When connected to CC this terminal setting stops the motor.
49 — Forward/Reverse — This setting operates in conjunction with another terminal being set to the Run/Stop (50) function.
When configured to Run (Run/Stop to CC), the make or break of this connection to CC changes the direction of the
motor.
50 — Run/Stop — This terminal enables the motor to run when connected to CC and disables the motor when the connection
is broken.
51 — Line Power Bypass — This function operates in conjunction with the Line Power Switching frequency setting (F355).
An enabled check box at Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Line Power Switching (At) and this input
terminal setting enables this function.
Once configured (including this terminal connection to CC), the frequency setting of Line Power Switching (Hz)
establishes the speed at which the drive terminates its output and routes commercial power to the motor.
Table 8 (Continued). Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions.
78 G7 ASD Operation Manual
52 — Frequency Priority — Connecting this terminal to CC allows for the frequency control to be switched from the
frequency command source selected as Frequency Mode #1 to Frequency Mode #2. This function is enabled by setting
the Reference Priority Selection to Frequency Source Priority Switching and is located at Program ⇒ Fundamental
Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Reference Priority Selection ⇒ Frequency Source Priority
Switching.
53 — VI/II Terminal Priority — Connecting this terminal to CC assigns command control to the VI/II Terminal and
overrides all other Control Terminal Strip input so long as the Command Mode is set to Use Control Terminal
Strip.
54 — Command Control Terminal Strip Priority — Connecting this terminal to CC overrides the FMOD setting and
assigns speed control to the Control Terminal Strip.
55 — Parameter Editing Enabling (LED) — The LED Keypad system is unavailable at the time of this release.
56 — Control Switch (torque, position) — This function allows for a system change from speed to torque or position as a
function of the V/f setting when connected to CC.
57 — Deviation Counter Clear — This function clears the Deviation Counter when operating in the Position Control
mode.
58 — Position Control Forward Limit LS — Connecting this terminal to CC will immediately stop the drive and hold its
position. If the connection remains the drive will time out and trip. This function is normally used for over-travel
conditions.
59 — Position Control Reverse Limit LS — Connecting this terminal to CC will immediately stop the drive and hold its
position. If the connection remains the drive will time out and trip. This function is normally used for over-travel
conditions.
60 — Light-Load High-Speed Operation Enable — Activating this terminal sets the lower limit of an output frequency
range in which the Light-load/High-speed function may be used (see F330). The Light-load/High-speed function
accelerates the output frequency of the ASD to the speed setting established in F341 for the duration of the activation.
61 — Snap Stop Control Enable — TBD.
62 — Pre-excite Motor — Connecting this terminal to CC applies an excitation current to the motor (holds shaft stationary)
for the duration of the connection.
63 — System Consistent Sequence (BC: braking command) — TBD.
64 — System Consistent Sequence (B: braking release) — Connecting this input terminal to CC initiates the brake release
command. This setting requires that another discrete input terminal be set to 65 [System Consistent Sequence
(BA: braking answer)] to complete the brake release command and to convey the status of the braking system to the
user or to a dependent subsystem.
Once the braking release function is initiated, the Trouble Internal Timer begins to count down (Trouble Internal
Timer value is set at F630). Should the count-down timer expire before the brake releases or before the Braking
Answer is returned, fault E-11will occur. Otherwise, the brake releases the motor and normal motor operations resume.
The Braking Release function is primarily used at startup; but, may be used when the brake is applied while the motor
is running.
65 — System Consistent Sequence (BA: braking answer) — This setting is required when the Braking Release (64)
function is used. The function of this input terminal is to receive the returned the status of the braking system. The
returned status is either Released or Not Released.
If Released is returned within the time setting of F630, normal system function resumes.
If Not Released is returned or if the F630 time setting times out before either signal is returned, then fault E-11 occurs.
The returned signal may also be used to notify the user or control a dependent subsystem.
66 — System Consistent Sequence (BT: braking test) — TBD.
67 — Output Frequency Hold — TBD.
Table 8 (Continued). Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 79
OUT1 Output Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal
Assignment ⇒ OUT1
This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT1 (A & C) output terminals to
1 of the 60 possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 81.
The on and off delay times of the OUT1 terminals may be adjusted to provide
more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F130
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Low
Changeable During Run — No
OUT2 Output Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal
Assignment ⇒ OUT2
This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT2 (A & C) output terminals to
1 of the 60 possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 81.
The on and off delay times of the OUT2 terminals may be adjusted to provide
more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F131
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — RCH (Acc/Dec
Complete)
Changeable During Run — No
FL Output Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal
Assignment ⇒ FL
This parameter sets the functionality of the FL output terminals to 1 of the 60
possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 81.
The on and off delay times of the FL terminals may be adjusted to provide
more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F132
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Fault (All)
Changeable During Run — No
Output #4 Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal
Assignment ⇒ 4
This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT4 terminals to 1 of the 60
possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 81.
The on and off delay times of the OUT4 terminals may be adjusted to provide
more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F133
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — LL
Changeable During Run — No
F130 F133
80 G7 ASD Operation Manual
OUT5 Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal
Assignment ⇒ 5
This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT5 terminals to 1 of the 60
possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 81.
The on and off delay times of the OUT5 terminals may be adjusted to provide
more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F134
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — UL
Changeable During Run — No
OUT6 Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal
Assignment ⇒ 6
This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT6 terminals to 1 of the 60
possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 81.
The on and off delay times of the OUT6 terminals may be adjusted to provide
more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F135
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — RCH (Specified
Speed)
Changeable During Run — No
OUT7 Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal
Assignment ⇒ 7
This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT7 terminals to 1 of the 60
possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 81.
The on and off delay times of the OUT7 terminals may be adjusted to provide
more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F136
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Overcurrent
Prealarm
Changeable During Run — No
F Input Terminal Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒
F
This parameter delays the response of the ASD to any change in the F terminal
input by the programmed value.
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F140
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
F134 F140
G7 ASD Operation Manual 81
Table 9. Discrete Output Terminal Assignment Selections.
Function Function
0Lower Limit (LL) 31 Ready for Operation (including ST and RUN)
1Upper Limit (UL) 32 Ready for Operation
2Low (speed setting of F100)33 POFF Alarm (poor control power supply)
3RCH (Acc/Dec completion) 34 System Consistent Sequence (BR: brake release)
4RCH (speed specified at F101)35 In Alarm Status
5Fault FL (all) 36 Forward Speed Limit (torque control)
6Fault FL (except EF or OCL) 37 Reverse Speed Limit (torque control)
7Overcurrent Pre-alarm 38 ASD Healthy Output
8ASD Overload Pre-alarm 39 Abnormal Communication Alarm 2 (internal cause)
9Motor Pre-alarm 40 Error Code Output 1 (6-bit error output)
10 Overheat Pre-alarm 41 Error Code Output 2 (6-bit error output)
11 Overvoltage Pre-alarm 42 Error Code Output 3 (6-bit error output)
12 DC Voltage Low Alarm 43 Error Code Output 4 (6-bit error output)
13 Low-current Alarm 44 Error Code Output 5 (6-bit error output)
14 Overtorque Alarm 45 Error Code Output 6 (6-bit error output)
15 Braking Resistor Overload Pre-alarm 46 Designated Data Output 1 (7-bit transmission output)
16 In Emergency Off 47 Designated Data Output 2 (7-bit transmission output)
17 Retrying 48 Designated Data Output 3 (7-bit transmission output)
18 Pattern Operation Switching Out 49 Designated Data Output 4 (7-bit transmission output)
19 PID Deviation Limit 50 Designated Data Output 5 (7-bit transmission output)
20 Start/Stop 51 Designated Data Output 6 (7-bit transmission output)
21 Serious Fault (OCA, OCL, EF, Lost Phase, Short
Circuit, or Abnormal Output) 52 Designated Data Output 7 (7-bit transmission output)
22 Light Fault (OL, OC1, 2, 3, OP) 53 Light Load Detection Signal
23 Bypass Output #1 54 Heavy Load Detection Signal
24 Bypass Output #2 55 Positive Torque Limit
25 Fan On/Off 56 Negative Torque Limit
26 Jogging 57 External Rush Suppression Relay Output
27 Control Terminal Strip Operation Command Mode 58 Over Travel
28 Total-operation-hours Alarm 59 Positioning Completion
29 Abnormal Communication Alarm (external cause) 60 Earth Fault Alarm
30 Forward/Reverse Operation 61 Low Output Disable Alarm
82 G7 ASD Operation Manual
R Input Terminal Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒
R
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the R terminal
input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F141
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
ST Input Terminal Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒
ST
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the ST
terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F142
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
RES Input Terminal Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒
RES
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the RES
terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F143
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
S1 – S4 Input Terminal Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒
S1 – S4
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the S1 – S4
terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F144
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
S5 – S16 Input Terminal Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒
S5 – S16
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the S5 – S16
terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F145
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
F141 F145
G7 ASD Operation Manual 83
OUT1 On Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT1
Once the condition is met to close the OUT1 (A & C) output terminals, this
parameter delays the closing of the terminals by the programmed value.
For example, if the OUT1 function is programmed as Overtorque Alarm,
OUT1 will close 2.0 mS (the default value for OUT1 On Delay) after the
overtorque condition occurs.
The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter.
Direct Access Number — F150
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
OUT2 On Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT2
This parameter delays the closing of the OUT2 (A & C) output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F150).
The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter.
Direct Access Number — F151
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
FL On Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ FL
This parameter delays the closing of the FL output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F150).
The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter.
Direct Access Number — F152
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
OUT4 On Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT4
This parameter delays the closing of the OUT4 output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F150).
The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter.
Direct Access Number — F153
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
OUT5 On Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT5
This parameter delays the closing of the OUT5 output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F150).
The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter.
Direct Access Number — F154
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
F150 F154
84 G7 ASD Operation Manual
OUT6 On Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT6
This parameter delays the closing of the OUT6 output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F150).
The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter.
Direct Access Number — F155
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
OUT7 On Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT7
This parameter delays the closing of the OUT7 output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F150).
The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter.
Direct Access Number — F156
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
OUT1 Off Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT1
This parameter delays the opening of the OUT1 (A & C) output terminals by
the programmed value.
The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT1 to
respond.
Direct Access Number — F160
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
OUT2 Off Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT2
This parameter delays the opening of the OUT2 (A & C) output terminals by
the programmed value (see waveforms at F160).
The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT2 to
respond.
Direct Access Number — F161
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
FL Off Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ FL
This parameter delays the opening of the FL output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F160).
The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to FL to
respond.
Direct Access Number — F162
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
F155 F162
G7 ASD Operation Manual 85
OUT4 Off Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT4
This parameter delays the opening of the OUT4 output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F160).
The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT4 to
respond.
Direct Access Number — F163
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
OUT5 Off Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT5
This parameter delays the opening of the OUT5 output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F160).
The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT5 to
respond.
Direct Access Number — F164
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
OUT6 Off Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT6
This parameter delays the opening of the OUT6 output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F160).
The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT6 to
respond.
Direct Access Number — F165
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
OUT7 Off Delay
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays
⇒ OUT7
This parameter delays the opening of the OUT7 output terminals by the
programmed value (see waveforms at F160).
The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT7 to
respond.
Direct Access Number — F166
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Motor #2 Base Frequency
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #2
The Motor #2 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output
voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The #2 Maximum Output
Voltage is set at F171.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #2 are
configured and selected. Motor set #2 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal.
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the name-
plated frequency of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F170
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
F163 F170
86 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Motor #2 Max Output Voltage
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #2
The Motor #2 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor #2 output voltage at
the Base Frequency (F170). Regardless of the programmed value, the output
voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting (F307).
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #2 are
configured and selected. Motor set #2 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal.
Direct Access Number — F171
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Volts
Motor #2 Torque Boost
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #2
The Motor #2 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency
torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the #2 Base Frequency setting (F170).
See parameter F016 (Motor #1 Torque Boost) for an explanation of torque
boost.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #2 are
configured and selected. Motor set #2 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal.
Direct Access Number — F172
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Electronic Thermal Protection #2
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #2
The Motor #2 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor
overload current level for motor set #2. This value is entered as either a
percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (V/A) or it
may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the
motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of
measurement (see F701 to change the display unit).
Electronic Thermal Protection settings (#1 – #4) will be displayed in Amps if
the EOI display units are set to V/A rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F173
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Motor #3 Base Frequency
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #3
The Motor #3 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output
voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Maximum Output
Voltage is set at F175.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #3 are
configured and selected. Motor set #3 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal.
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the name-
plated frequency of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F174
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
F171 F174
G7 ASD Operation Manual 87
Motor #3 Max Output Voltage
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #3
The Motor #3 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor #3 output voltage at
the Base Frequency (F174). Regardless of the programmed value, the output
voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting (F307).
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #3 are
configured and selected. Motor set #3 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal.
Direct Access Number — F175
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Volts
Motor #3 Torque Boost
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #3
The Motor #3 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency
torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the #3 Base Frequency setting (F174).
See parameter F016 (Motor #1 Torque Boost) for an explanation of torque
boost.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #3 are
configured and selected. Motor set #3 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal.
Direct Access Number — F176
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Electronic Thermal Protection #3
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #3
The Motor #3 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor
overload current level for motor set #3. This value is entered as either a
percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (V/A) or it
may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the
motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of
measurement (see F701 to change the display unit).
Electronic Thermal Protection settings (#1 – #4) will be displayed in Amps if
the EOI display units are set to V/A rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F177
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Motor #4 Base Frequency
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #4
The Motor #4 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output
voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Maximum Output
Voltage is set at F179.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #4 are
configured and selected. Motor set #4 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal.
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the name-
plated frequency of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F178
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
F175 F178
88 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Motor #4 Max Output Voltage
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #4
The Motor #3 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor #4 output voltage at
the Base Frequency (F178). Regardless of the programmed value, the output
voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting (F307).
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #4 are
configured and selected. Motor set #4 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal.
Direct Access Number — F179
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Volts
Motor #4 Torque Boost
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #4
The Motor #4 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency
torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the #4 Base Frequency setting (F178).
See parameter F016 (Motor #1 Torque Boost) for an explanation of torque
boost.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #4 are
configured and selected. Motor set #4 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal.
Direct Access Number — F180
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Electronic Thermal Protection #4
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #4
The Motor #4 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor
overload current level for motor set #4. This value is entered as either a
percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (V/A) or it
may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the
motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of
measurement (see F701 to change the display unit).
Electronic Thermal Protection settings (#1 – #4) will be displayed in Amps if
the EOI display units are set to V/A rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F181
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
V/f Adjustment Coefficient
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒ V/f
Adjustment Coefficient
This parameter may be used in the Constant Torque or the Variable Torque
modes only and should be adjusted gradually to improve the application-
specific torque requirements. The Torque Boost setting (F016) may be adjusted
to improve the low-frequency torque performance.
Note: The Torque Boost setting should be adjusted gradually before
attempting performance corrections using this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F183
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 32
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
F179 F183
G7 ASD Operation Manual 89
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Frequency setting establishes the
frequency that is to be associated with the voltage setting of F191 (Custom V/f
Five-Point Setting #1 Voltage).
The V/f five-point settings define a custom volts per hertz relationship for the
startup output of the ASD.
To enable this function, set the V/f Pattern (F015) selection to Custom V/f
Curve.
Custom V/f Curves may be useful in starting high inertia loads such as rotary
drum vacuum filters.
Direct Access Number — F190
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 299
Units — Hz
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Voltage
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Voltage establishes the percentage of
the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F190
(Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Frequency).
See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.
Direct Access Number — F191
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #2 Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five Point Setting #2 Frequency sets the frequency to be
associated with parameter F193 (Custom V/f Five Point Setting #2 Voltage).
See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.
Direct Access Number — F192
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 299
Units — Hz
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #2 Voltage
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #2 Voltage establishes the percentage of
the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F192
(Custom V/f Five Point Setting #2 Frequency).
See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.
Direct Access Number — F193
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
F190 F193
90 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #3 Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five Point Setting #3 Frequency sets the frequency to be
associated with parameter F195 (Custom V/f Five Point Setting #3 Voltage).
See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.
Direct Access Number — F194
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 299
Units — Hz
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #3 Voltage
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #3 Voltage establishes the percentage of
the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F194
(Custom V/f Five Point Setting #3 Frequency).
See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.
Direct Access Number — F195
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #4 Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five Point Setting #4 Frequency sets the frequency to be
associated with parameter F197 (Custom V/f Five Point Setting #4 Voltage).
See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.
Direct Access Number — F196
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 299
Units — Hz
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #4 Voltage
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #4 Voltage establishes the percentage of
the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F196
(Custom V/f Five Point Setting #4 Frequency).
See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.
Direct Access Number — F197
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #5 Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five Point Setting #5 Frequency sets the frequency to be
associated with parameter F199 (Custom V/f Five Point Setting #5 Voltage).
See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.
Direct Access Number — F198
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 299
Units — Hz
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #5 Voltage
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #5 Voltage establishes the percentage of
the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F198
(Custom V/f Five Point Setting #5 Frequency).
See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.
Direct Access Number — F199
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
F194 F199
G7 ASD Operation Manual 91
Reference Priority Selection
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Reference Priority Selection
Either Frequency Mode #1 or Frequency Mode #2 may control the output
frequency of the ASD. This parameter determines which of the two will control
the output frequency and the conditions in which control will be switched from
one to the other.
Settings:
Frequency Source #1
Frequency Source #2
Frequency Source #1 Priority
Frequency Source #2 Priority
Frequency Source Priority Switching
The Frequency Source #1 or #2 setting specifies the source of the input
frequency command signal. These settings are performed in F004 and F207,
respectively.
If Frequency Source #1 is selected here, the ASD will follow the settings of
F004. If Frequency Source #2 is selected here, the ASD will follow the
settings of F207.
The Frequency Source #1 Priority and Frequency Source #2 Priority
selections are used in conjunction with the Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency
setting (F208). Parameter F208 establishes a threshold frequency that will be
used as a reference when determining when to switch output control between
the Frequency Mode #1 setting and the Frequency Mode #2 setting.
If Frequency Source #1 Priority is selected here and the commanded
frequency of Frequency Source #1exceeds the F208 setting, the Frequency
Mode #1 setting has priority over the Frequency Mode #2 setting.
If Frequency Source #2 Priority is selected here and the commanded
frequency of Frequency Source #2 exceeds the F208 setting, the Frequency
Mode #2 setting has priority over Frequency Mode #1 setting.
Frequency Source Priority Switching allows for a preconfigured input
terminal to activate Frequency Source #1 or Frequency Source #2. Any
unused programmable discrete input terminals may be programmed as the
Frequency Priority switching terminal.
Direct Access Number — F200
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Frequency Source #1
Changeable During Run — Yes
F200 F200
92 G7 ASD Operation Manual
VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ VI/II
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminals when
either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control or the Torque Control mode.
Note: See note on pg. 46 for further information on the VI/II terminal.
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the
VI/II terminals:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Command Mode ⇒ Use Control Terminal Strip.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ Use VI/II.
• Provide a Run command (F or R).
Gain and Bias Settings
When operating in the Speed Control mode, the settings that determine the
gain and bias of the VI/II terminals are:
•VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) (F202),
•the VI/II input signal level that represents VI/II Speed Reference
Setpoint #1 (frequency): F201,
•VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) (F204), and
•the VI/II input signal level that represents VI/II Speed Reference
Setpoint #2 (frequency): F203.
When operating in the Torque Control mode, the settings that determine the
gain and bias of the VI/II terminals are:
•Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%) (F205),
•the VI/II input signal level that represents the VI/II Torque
Reference Setpoint #1 (%): F201,
•Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%) (F206),
•the VI/II input signal level that represents Torque Reference
Setpoint #2 (%): F203.
Once set, as the VI/II input changes, the output frequency or the output torque
of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets the VI/II input level that represents VI/II Speed Reference
Setpoint #1 (torque or frequency). This value is entered as 0 – 100% of the
VI/II input signal range.
The input signal may be trimmed using F470 (Bias) and F471 (Gain).
The default value for this parameter (F201) is 20%. The II input is commonly
used for the 4 – 20 mA current loop signal where 4 mA equals 20% of a 20 mA
signal. If the VI input is used (0 – 10 VDC input), parameter F201 may be
changed to 0.0% (of the input signal).
Direct Access Number — F201
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 20.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0%
Units — %
Frequency Settings
Torque Settings
VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ VI/II
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminals when
either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
See F201 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F201.
Direct Access Number — F202
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F201 F202
G7 ASD Operation Manual 93
VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ VI/II
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminals when
either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control or the Torque Control mode.
See F201 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets the VI/II input level that represents Reference Setpoint #2
(torque or frequency). This value is entered as 0 – 100% of the VI/II input
signal range.
Direct Access Number — F203
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ VI/II
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminals when
either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
See F201 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F203.
Direct Access Number — F204
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ VI/II
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminals when
either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a
given VI/II input level and motor load.
See F201 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%) and is the output
torque value that is associated with the setting of F201. This value is entered as
0 to 250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F205
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ VI/II
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminals when
either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a
given VI/II input level and motor load.
See F201 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%) and is the output
torque value that is associated with the setting of F203. This value is entered as
0 to 250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F206
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
F203 F206
94 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Frequency Mode #2
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection
This parameter selects the source of the frequency command signal to be used
as Frequency Mode #2 in the event that Frequency Mode #1 is disabled or if
Frequency Mode #2 is set up as the primary control parameter. See F004 and
F200 for additional information on this setting.
Settings:
Use VI/II
Use RR
Use RX
Use Option Card RX2
Use LED Keypad Option
Use Binary/BCD Input
Use Common Serial (TTL)
Use RS232/RS485
Use Communication Card
Use Motorized Pot. Simulation
Use Pulse Input Option
Direct Access Number — F207
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — VI/II
Changeable During Run — Yes
Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency
This parameter sets the threshold frequency that will be used in F200 to
determine if Frequency Source #1 or #2 will control the output of the ASD.
See F200 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F208
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Analog Input Filter
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Analog Filter
Analog filtering is applied after the analog reference signal is converted to a
digital signal. The type of filtering used is Rolling Average over time.
Settings:
None
Small
Medium
Large
The analog input signal is sampled and converted to a digital signal. With no
filtering applied, the digital value from the conversion is scaled for use by the
microprocessor of the ASD.
If the filtering selection is Small, the ASD averages the last 5 sampled (digital)
values. The rolling average is updated (every 4 µS) and scaled for use by the
microprocessor.
If the filtering selection is Medium, the ASD averages the last 20 sampled
(digital) values. The rolling average is updated (every 4 µS) and scaled for use
by the microprocessor.
If the filtering selection is Large, the ASD averages the last 50 sampled
(digital) values. The rolling average is updated (every 4 µS) and scaled for use
by the microprocessor.
False responses to electrical noise are eliminated with no loss in bandwidth
because the value used by the drive is the average value of several samples.
Direct Access Number — F209
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
F207 F209
G7 ASD Operation Manual 95
RR Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RR
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or
the Torque Control mode.
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the
RR terminal:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Command Mode ⇒ Use Control Terminal Strip.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ Use RR.
• Provide a Run command (F or R).
Gain and Bias Settings
When operating in the Speed Control mode, the settings that determine the gain
and bias of the RR terminal are:
•RR Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) (F211),
•the RR input signal level that represents RR Speed Reference
Setpoint #1 (frequency): F210,
•RR Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) (F213), and
•the RR input signal level that represents RR Speed Reference
Setpoint #2 (frequency): F212.
When operating in the Torque Control mode, the settings that determine the
gain and bias of the RR terminal are:
•Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%) (F214),
•the RR input signal level that represents the RR Torque Reference
Setpoint #1 (%): F210,
•Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%) (F215), and
•the RR input signal level that represents the RR Torque Reference
Setpoint #2 (%): F212.
Once set, as the RR input voltage changes, the output frequency or the output
torque of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets the RR input level that represents RR Speed Reference
Setpoint #1 (torque or frequency). This value is entered as 0 – 100% of the
0 – 10 VDC RR input signal range.
The input signal may be trimmed using F472 (Bias) and F473 (Gain).
Direct Access Number — F210
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Frequency Settings
Torque Settings
RR Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RR
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control
mode.
See F210 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets the RR Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) and is
the frequency that is associated with the setting of F210.
Direct Access Number — F211
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — Hz
F210 F211
96 G7 ASD Operation Manual
RR Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RR
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or
the Torque Control mode.
See F210 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets the RR input level that represents RR Reference Setpoint
#2 (frequency) (torque or frequency). This value is entered as 0 – 100% of the
0 – 10 VDC RR input signal range.
Direct Access Number — F212
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
RR Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RR
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control
mode.
See F210 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RR Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F212.
Direct Access Number — F213
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — Hz
RR Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RR
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control
mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given
RR input level and motor load.
See F210 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RR Torque Reference Setpoint #1 and is the output torque
value that is associated with setting of F210. This value is entered as 0 – 250%
of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F214
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
RR Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RR
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control
mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given
RR input level and motor load.
See F210 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RR Torque Reference Setpoint #2 and is the output torque
value that is associated with setting of F212. This value is entered as 0 – 250%
of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F215
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
F212 F215
G7 ASD Operation Manual 97
RX Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the
RX input terminal:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Command Mode ⇒ Use Control Terminal Strip.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Frequency Mode #1⇒ Use RX.
• Provide a Run command (F or R).
Gain and Bias Settings
When operating in the Speed Control mode, the settings that determine the
direction, gain, and bias of the RX terminal are:
•RX Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) (F217),
•the RX input signal level that represents RX Speed Reference
Setpoint #1 (frequency): F216,
•RX Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) (F219), and
•the RX input signal level that represents RX Speed Reference
Setpoint #2 (frequency): F218.
When operating in the Torque Control mode, the settings that determine the
direction, gain, and bias of the RX terminal are:
•RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%) (F220),
•the RX input signal level that represents the RX Torque Reference
Setpoint #1 (%): F216,
•RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%) (F221), and
•the RX input signal level that represents the RX Torque Reference
Setpoint #2 (%): F218.
Once set, as the RX input voltage changes, the directional information, the
output frequency, or the output torque of the drive will vary in accordance with
the above settings.
This parameter sets the RX input level that represents RX Reference Setpoint
#1 (direction/torque/frequency). This value is entered as -100 to +100% of the
-10 to +10 VDC RX input signal range.
The input signal may be trimmed using F474 (Bias) and F475 (Gain).
Direct Access Number — F216
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Frequency Settings
Torque Settings
RX Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See F216 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RX Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F216.
Direct Access Number — F217
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -80.0
Maximum — +80.0
Units — Hz
F216 F217
98 G7 ASD Operation Manual
RX Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.
See F216 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets the RX input level that represents RX Reference Setpoint
#2 (frequency) (direction/torque/frequency). The range of values for this
parameter is -100 to +100% of the -10 to +10 VDC RX input signal range.
Direct Access Number — F218
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
RX Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See F216 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RX Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F218.
Direct Access Number — F219
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -80.0
Maximum — +80.0
Units — Hz
RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RX
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Torque Control mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a
given RX input level and motor load.
See F216 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%) and is the output
torque value that is associated with setting of F216. This value is entered as
-250 to +250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F220
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.0
Maximum — +250.0
Units — %
RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RX
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Torque Control mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a
given RX input level and motor load.
See F220 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%) and is the output
torque value that is associated with setting of F218. This value is entered as
-250 to +250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F221
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.0
Maximum — +250.0
Units — %
F218 F221
G7 ASD Operation Manual 99
RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX2
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX2 input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.
Note: The RX2 input terminal may be used with the ASD-Multicom
option board only.
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the
RX2 input terminal:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Command Mode ⇒ Use Control Terminal Strip.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Frequency Mode #1⇒ Use Option Card RX2.
• Provide a Run command (F or R).
Gain and Bias Settings
When operating in the Speed Control mode, the settings that determine the
direction, gain, and bias of the RX2 terminal are:
•RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) (F223),
•the RX2 input signal level that represents RX2 Speed Reference
Setpoint #1 (frequency): F222,
•RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) (F225), and
•the RX2 input signal level that represents RX2 Speed Reference
Setpoint #2 (frequency): F224.
When operating in the Torque Control mode, the settings that determine the
direction, gain, and bias of the RX2 terminal are:
•RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%) (F226),
•the RX2 input signal level that represents the RX2 Torque Reference
Setpoint #1 (%): F222,
•RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%) (F227), and
•the RX2 input signal level that represents the RX2 Torque Reference
Setpoint #2 (%): F224.
Once set, as the RX2 input voltage changes, the directional information, the
output frequency, or the output torque of the drive will vary in accordance with
the above settings.
This parameter sets the RX2 input level that represents RX2 Reference
Setpoint #1 (frequency) (direction/torque/frequency). This value is entered as
-100 to +100% of the -10 to +10 VDC RX2 input signal range.
The input signal may be trimmed using F476 (Bias) and F477 (Gain).
Direct Access Number — F222
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Frequency Settings
Torque Settings
RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX2
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX2 input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See F222 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F222.
Direct Access Number — F223
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -80.0
Maximum — +80.0
Units — Hz
F222 F223
100 G7 ASD Operation Manual
RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX2
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX2 input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.
See F222 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets the RX2 input level that represents RX2 Reference
Setpoint #2 (frequency) (direction/torque/frequency). This value is entered as
-100 to +100% of the -10 to +10 VDC RX2 input signal range.
Direct Access Number — F224
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX2
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX2 input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See F222 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F224.
Direct Access Number — F225
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -80.0
Maximum — +80.0
Units — Hz
RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RX2
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX2 input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Torque Control mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a
given RX2 input level and motor load.
See F222 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%) and is the output
torque value that is associated with the setting of F222. This value is entered as
-250 to +250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F226
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.0
Maximum — +250.0
Units — %
RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RX2
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the RX2 input
terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Torque Control mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a
given RX2 input level and motor load.
See F222 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%) and is the output
torque value that is associated with the setting of F224. This value is entered as
-250 to +250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F227
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.0
Maximum — +250.0
Units — %
F224 F227
G7 ASD Operation Manual 101
BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ BIN
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the BIN binary input
terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in
the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive a binary control
input:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Command Mode ⇒ Use Control Terminal Strip.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Frequency Mode #1⇒ Use Binary/BCD Input.
•Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminals;
select and set the desired discrete input terminals to Binary Bit(s) 0 –
7 (or 0 – MSB). The binary terminal input word will control the
direction, speed, or torque of the motor.
• Provide a Run command (F or R).
Direction/Gain/Bias Setting
When operating in the Speed Control mode, the settings that determine the
direction, gain, and bias of the BIN binary input terminals are:
•BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) (F229),
• the binary input value (% of 255D) that represents the BIN Speed
Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency): F228,
•BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) (F231), and
• the binary input value (% of 255D) that represents the BIN Speed
Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency): F230.
Note: 255D is the decimal equivalent of the 8-bit BIN word with all
input terminals set to one (255 decimal = 11111111 binary).
When operating in the Torque Control mode, the settings that determine the
direction, gain, and bias of the BIN binary input terminals are:
•BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%) (F232),
• the binary input value (% of 255D) that represents the BIN Torque
Reference Setpoint #1: F228,
•BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%) (F233), and
• the binary input value (% of 255D) that represents the BIN Torque
Reference Setpoint #2: F230.
Once set, as the BIN input word changes, the directional information, the
output frequency, or the output torque of the drive will vary in accordance with
the above settings.
This parameter sets BIN Reference Setpoint #1 (direction/torque/frequency)
and is entered as 0 to 100% of the BIN binary input word 11111111 (255D).
Direct Access Number — F228
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Frequency Settings
Torque Settings
F228 F228
102 G7 ASD Operation Manual
BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ BIN
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the BIN binary input
terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in
the Speed Control mode.
See F228 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F228.
Direct Access Number — F229
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -80.0
Maximum — +80.0
Units — Hz
BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ BIN
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the BIN binary input
terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in
the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.
See F228 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets BIN Reference Setpoint #2 (direction/torque/frequency)
and is entered as 0 to 100% of the BIN binary input word 11111111 (255D).
Direct Access Number — F230
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ BIN
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the BIN binary input
terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in
the Speed Control mode.
See F228 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F230.
Direct Access Number — F231
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -80.0
Maximum — +80.0
Units — Hz
BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ BIN
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the BIN binary input
terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in
the Torque Control mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given
BIN binary input and motor load.
See F228 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%) and is entered as
-250 to +250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F232
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.0
Maximum — +250.0
Units — %
F229 F232
G7 ASD Operation Manual 103
BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ BIN
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the BIN binary input
terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in
the Torque Control mode.
This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given
BIN binary input and motor load.
See F232 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%) and is entered as
-250 to +250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F233
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.0
Maximum — +250.0
Units — %
PG Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ PG
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the PG input
terminal when it is used as the Speed/Direction control input. The PG input
signal is a pulse count originating from a shaft-mounted Encoder.
Note: The PG input terminal may be used with the ASD-Multicom
option board only.
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive a binary control
input:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Command Mode ⇒ (any setting).
•Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Frequency Mode #1⇒ Use Pulse Input Option.
• Provide a Run command (F or R).
The settings that determine the direction, gain, and bias of the PG input are:
•PG Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) (F235),
•the PG input pulse count that represents PG Speed Reference
Setpoint #1 (frequency): F234,
•PG Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) (F237), and
•the PG input pulse count that represents PG Speed Reference
Setpoint #2 (frequency): F236.
Once set, as the PG input pulse count changes, the directional information or
the output frequency of the drive will vary in accordance with the above
settings.
This parameter sets the PG input pulse count that represents Reference
Setpoint #1 (frequency) (direction/speed). The range of values for this
parameter is -100 to +100% of the PG input pulse count range.
Note: Further application-specific PG settings may be performed from
the following path: Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG
Settings.
Direct Access Number — F234
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
Frequency Settings
F233 F234
104 G7 ASD Operation Manual
PG Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ PG
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the PG input
terminal when it is used as the Speed/Direction-Control input.
See F234 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets PG Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F234.
Direct Access Number — F235
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -80.0
Maximum — +80.0
Units — Hz
PG Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ PG
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the PG input
terminal when it is used as the Speed/Direction-Control input.
See F234 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets the PG input pulse count that represents Reference
Setpoint #1 (direction/speed). The range of values for this parameter is -100 to
+100% of the PG input pulse count range.
Direct Access Number — F236
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
PG Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ PG
This parameter is used to set the direction, gain, and bias of the PG input
terminal when it is used as the Speed/Direction-Control input.
See F234 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets PG Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency) and is the
frequency that is associated with the setting of F236.
Direct Access Number — F237
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -80.0
Maximum — +80.0
Units — Hz
Startup Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Frequency Control
The output of the drive will remain at 0.0 Hz until the programmed speed value
exceeds this setting during startup. Once exceeded during startup, the output
frequency of the drive will accelerate to the programmed setting.
Output frequencies below the Startup Frequency will not be output from the
drive during startup. However, once reaching the Startup Frequency, speed
values below the Startup Frequency may be output from the drive.
Direct Access Number — F240
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Hz
Run Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Frequency Control
This parameter establishes a center frequency (Run Frequency) of a frequency
band.
Parameter F242 provides a plus-or-minus value for the Run Frequency; thus,
establishing a frequency band.
During acceleration, the drive will not output a signal to the motor until the
lower level of the band is reached.
During deceleration, the drive will continue to output the programmed
deceleration output signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is
reached; at which time the output will go to 0.0 Hz.
Direct Access Number — F241
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F235 F241
G7 ASD Operation Manual 105
Run Frequency Hysteresis
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Frequency Control
This parameter provides a plus-or-minus value for the Run Frequency setting
(F241).
Direct Access Number — F242
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
End Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Frequency Control
This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the drive will recognize during
deceleration before the drive goes to 0.0 Hz.
Direct Access Number — F243
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
0 Hz Dead Band Signal
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒ Dead
Band of 0 Hz Frequency
This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that, until the commanded
frequency surpasses this setting, the ASD will output 0 Hz to the motor.
Note: This setting will override the Startup Frequency setting (F240)
if this setting has a higher value.
Direct Access Number — F244
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 5.0
Units — Hz
DC Injection Braking Start Frequency
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ DC Braking
During deceleration this is the frequency at which DC Injection braking will
start.
DC Injection Braking
DC Injection Braking is a braking system used with three-phase motors.
Unlike conventional brakes, there is no physical contact between the rotating
shaft and a stationary brake pad or drum. When braking is required, the drive
outputs a DC current that is applied to the windings of the motor to quickly
brake the motor. The braking current stops when the time entered in F252
times out.
The intensity of the DC current used while braking determines how fast the
motor will come to a stop and may be set at F251. The intensity setting is
entered as a percentage of the full load current of the ASD.
DC Injection Braking is also used to preheat the motor or to keep the rotor
from spinning freely when the motor is off by providing a pulsating DC current
into the motor at the Carrier Frequency. This feature may be enabled at F254.
Direct Access Number — F250
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 120.0
Units — Hz
DC Injection Braking Current
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ DC Braking
This parameter sets the percentage of the rated current of the drive that will be
used for DC Injection braking. A larger load will require a higher setting.
Direct Access Number — F251
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
F242 F251
106 G7 ASD Operation Manual
DC Injection Braking Time
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ DC Braking
This parameter is used to set the on-time duration of the DC Injection
Braking.
Direct Access Number — F252
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Motor Shaft Fixing Control
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ DC Braking
This parameter determines if DC Injection braking is to be used during a
change in the direction of the motor.
Settings:
Box checked (Enabled)
Box not checked (Disabled)
Direct Access Number — F253
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Motor Shaft Stationary Control
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ DC Braking
This parameter Enables/Disables a continuous DC injection at half of the
amperage setting of F251 into a stopped motor. This feature is useful in
preheating the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely.
Motor Shaft Stationary Control starts after the DC injection brake stops the
motor and continues until ST – CC is opened, power is turned off, receiving an
Emergency Off command, or this parameter is changed.
Enabling this feature will also require a non-zero entry at F250.
Settings:
Box checked (Enabled)
Box not checked (Disabled)
Direct Access Number — F254
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
0 Hz Command Function
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒ Dead
Band of 0 Hz Frequency
This parameter selects the go-to-zero method to be used by the ASD when the
ASD is commanded to go to zero Hz.
Settings:
Standard (DC Injection Braking)
0 Hz Command
Direct Access Number — F255
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Standard (DC
Injection Braking)
Changeable During Run — No
F252 F255
G7 ASD Operation Manual 107
Jog Run Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Jog Settings
This parameter sets the output frequency of the drive during a Jog. Jogging is
the term used to describe turning the motor on for small increments of time and
is used when precise positioning of motor-driven equipment is required.
Enabling the Jog Window allows for the Manual Jog window to be among the
screens accessed during repeated MON/PRG entries. This screen must be
displayed when Jogging using the EOI.
The Jog function may be initiated from the EOI or remotely via the Control
Terminal Strip or using Communications (for further information on using
Communications for Jogging, see the Communications manual).
To perform a Jog, set this parameter (F260) to the desired Jog frequency.
Select a Jog Stop method (F261).
Jog Using the EOI
To initiate a Jog from the EOI perform the following:
1. Place a check in the Enable Jog Window box (Program ⇒ Frequency
Setting Parameters ⇒ Jog Settings ⇒ Enable Jog Window).
Note: The Jog Window must be displayed on the EOI to perform the
Jog function using the EOI.
2. Press MON/PRG to access the Jog Window.
3. Using the Up/Down arrow keys of the EOI, select Reverse or
Forward.
4. Place the system in the Local mode (Local/Remote LED is on).
5. Press and hold the Run key for the desired Jog duration.
Jog Using the Control Terminal Strip
To initiate a Jog from the Control Terminal Strip perform the following:
1. Assign a discrete input terminal to the Jog function (see Table 8 on pg.
76).
2. Assign a discrete input terminal to the F (Forward) function (and
Reverse if required) (see Table 8 on pg. 76).
3. Provide a Forward and/or Reverse command from the Control
Terminal Strip.
4. From the Jog Window, use the Up/Down arrow keys of the EOI to
select Reverse or Forward (Program ⇒ Frequency Setting
Parameters ⇒ Jog Settings ⇒ Enable Jog Window). Press MON/
PRG to access the Jog Window.
5. Place the system in the Remote mode (Local/Remote LED is off).
6. Connect the assigned Jog terminal (from step 1) to CC for the desired
Jog duration.
Direct Access Number — F260
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 20.00
Units — Hz
F260 F260
108 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Jog Stop Control
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Jog Settings
This parameter sets the stopping method used while operating in the Jog mode.
Settings:
Deceleration Stop
Coast Stop
DC Injection Braking Stop
Direct Access Number — F261
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Deceleration Stop
Changeable During Run — Yes
Jump Frequency #1
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Jump Frequencies
In conjunction with parameter F271, this parameter establishes a user-defined
frequency range: the Jump Frequency and a plus-or-minus value. During
acceleration, the output frequency of the drive will hold at the frequency of the
lower level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed acceleration
ramp reaches the upper level of the Jump Frequency range. Then, the output
frequency of the drive will accelerate to the upper level of the Jump
Frequency range and continue upward as programmed.
During deceleration, the output frequency of the drive will hold at the
frequency of the upper level of the Jump Frequency range until the
programmed deceleration ramp reaches the lower level of the Jump Frequency
range. Then, the output frequency of the drive will decelerate to the lower level
of the Jump Frequency range and continue downward as programmed.
Once set up and enabled, it is on in all control modes.
User-selected frequencies may be jumped to avoid the negative effects of
mechanical resonance.
Direct Access Number — F270
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Jump Frequency #1 Bandwidth
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Jump Frequencies
This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency #1 (see
F270).
Direct Access Number — F271
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Jump Frequency #2
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Jump Frequencies
Same as Jump Frequency #1 (F270) and is used when multiple frequencies
are to be jumped (see the plus-or-minus value setting at F273). When multiple
jump frequencies overlap, the system will recognize the lowest and the highest
frequencies as one jump range.
Direct Access Number — F272
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Jump Frequency #2 Bandwidth
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Jump Frequencies
This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency #2
(F272).
Direct Access Number — F273
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
F261 F273
G7 ASD Operation Manual 109
Jump Frequency #3
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Jump Frequencies
Same as Jump Frequency #1 (F270) and is used when multiple frequencies
are to be jumped (see the plus-or-minus value setting at F275). When multiple
jump frequencies overlap, the system will recognize the lowest and the highest
frequencies as one jump range.
Direct Access Number — F274
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Jump Frequency #3 Bandwidth
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Jump Frequencies
This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency #3
(F274).
Direct Access Number — F275
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
Jump Frequency Processing
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Jump Frequencies ⇒ Jump
Frequency Processing
This parameter determines if the output frequency of the ASD or the PID
feedback signal will be used as a reference for determining the Jump
Frequency range.
See F270 for further information on the Jump Frequency settings.
Settings:
Process Amount (use PID feedback)
Output Frequency
Direct Access Number — F276
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Process Amount
Changeable During Run — Yes
Preset Speed #8
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 8
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1000 and is
identified as Preset Speed #8. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F287
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #9
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 9
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1001 and is
identified as Preset Speed #9. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F288
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
F274 F288
110 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Preset Speed #10
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 10
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1010 and is
identified as Preset Speed #10. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F289
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #11
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 11
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1011 and is
identified as Preset Speed #11. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F290
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #12
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 12
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1100 and is
identified as Preset Speed #12. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F291
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #13
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 13
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1101 and is
identified as Preset Speed #13. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F292
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #14
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 14
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1110 and is
identified as Preset Speed #14. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F293
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed #15
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 15
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1111 and is
identified as Preset Speed #15. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further
information on this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F294
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
F289 F294
G7 ASD Operation Manual 111
PWM Carrier Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Carrier Frequency
This parameter sets the frequency of the pulse width modulation signal applied
to the motor.
Note: The carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or above except when
operating in the Constant Torque, Variable Torque, or the 5-
Point Setting modes.
Note: The maximum Carrier Frequency setting allowed is 5.0 kHz for
the following ASDs:
230-volt ⇒ 75 HP – 150 HP.
460-volt ⇒ 150 HP – 350 HP.
600-volt ⇒ 150 HP – 300 HP.
The maximum Carrier Frequency setting allowed for all other
ASDs is 15 kHz.
Setting the Carrier Frequency above the Derate Threshold frequency (as listed
below) for a given ASD will reduce the capability of the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F300
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.200
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.500
Maximum — (ASD-dependent)
Units — kHz
Example
Break/Make ST
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Retry/Restart
This parameter Enables/Disables the ability of the drive to start into a spinning
motor when the ST – CC connection opens momentarily and is then closed
(Break/Make ST) or after a power interruption (momentary power failure). This
parameter also Enables/Disables F312 and F313.
Settings:
Box checked (Enabled)
Box not checked (Disabled)
Direct Access Number — F301
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Carrier-Frequency Derate Threshold Frequency
Derate Threshold Frequency
2.2 kHz 5.0 kHz 6.0 kHz 8.0 kHz
VT130G7U
2750B – 215KB 2500B 6160B 2010B – 2600B
2750B – 215KB 2600B 6400B 2400B
415KB – 435KB 4400B 6400B 4015B – 4330B
415KB – 435KB 412KB 4500B – 410KB
615KB – 635KB 410KB 4600B – 4750B
412KB 6015B – 6120B
610KB 6220B – 6330B
610KB 6220B – 6330B
612KB 6500B – 6750B
6500B – 6750B
F300 F301
112 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Ridethrough Mode
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
This parameter determines the motor-control response of the drive in the event
of a momentary power outage.
Settings:
Off
Ridethrough
Stop
Direct Access Number — F302
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — Yes
Number of Retries
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Retry/Restart
After a trip has occurred, this parameter sets the number of times that an
automatic system restart is attempted for a qualified trip.
The trip conditions listed below will not initiate the automatic Retry/Restart
function:
• OCA1, 2, or 3 (Arm Short Ckt),
• EPH1 (Input Phase Failure),
• EPH0 (Output Phase Failure),
• OCL (Startup Overcurrent),
• EF1 or 2 (Ground Fault),
• EMG (Emergency Off),
• EEP1 (EEPROM Fault),
• Err2 through Err9 (Main RAM/ROM Fault), or
• E-10 (Sink/Source Error),
• 13 (Speed Error), or
• 17 (Key Error).
See the section titled General Safety Information on pg. 1 for further
information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F303
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 00
Maximum — 10
Dynamic Braking Enable
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Dynamic Braking
This parameter Enables/Disables the Dynamic Braking system.
Settings:
Enabled with Overload
Disabled
Dynamic Braking
Dynamic Braking uses the inertial energy of the load to produce a braking
force or it may be used to reduce the bus voltage in an attempt to preclude an
overvoltage trip during deceleration. The inertial energy of the load drives the
rotor and induces a current into the stator of the motor.
The induced stator current (energy) is dissipated through a resistive load. The
resistive load is connected across terminals PA and PB (non-polarized). Using a
low-value, high-wattage resistance as a load for the generated current, the
resistive load dissipates the induced energy. The dissipated energy is the energy
that would otherwise have caused the rotor to continue to rotate.
Dynamic Braking helps to slow the load quickly; it cannot act as a holding
brake.
The Dynamic Braking function may be setup and enabled by connecting a
braking resistor from terminal PA to PB of the drive and providing the proper
information at F304, F308, and F309.
For additional information on selecting the proper resistance value for a given
application contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department.
Direct Access Number — F304
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F302 F304
G7 ASD Operation Manual 113
Overvoltage Stall
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Stall
This parameter Enables/Disables the Overvoltage Stall function. When
enabled, this function causes the drive to extend the decel time when the DC
bus voltage increases due to transient voltage spikes, regeneration, supply
voltage out of specification, etc. in an attempt to reduce the bus voltage.
Settings:
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled (Forced Shorted Deceleration)
Direct Access Number — F305
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Motor #1 Max Output Voltage
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #1
This parameter sets the maximum value of the output voltage of the drive. The
Motor #1 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor #1 output voltage at the
Base Frequency (F014). Regardless of the programmed value, the output
voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting (F307).
Direct Access Number — F306
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Volts
Supply Voltage Compensation
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Base Frequency Voltage
This parameter Enables/Disables the Voltage Compensation function. This
function provides an output waveform adjustment that compensates for changes
in the input voltage.
Settings:
Box checked (Enabled)
Box not checked (Disabled)
Direct Access Number — F307
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — No
Dynamic Braking Resistance
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Dynamic Braking
This parameter is used to input the resistive value of the Dynamic Braking
Resistor.
For additional information on selecting the proper resistance value for a given
application contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department.
Note: Using a resistor value that is too low may result in system
damage.
Direct Access Number — F308
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1.0
Maximum — 1000.0
Units — Ω
Dynamic Braking Resistance Capacity
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Dynamic Braking
This parameter is used to input the wattage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor.
For additional information on selecting the proper resistor wattage value for a
given application contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department.
Note: Using a resistor with a wattage rating that is too low may result
in system damage.
Direct Access Number — F309
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.0
Units — kW
F305 F309
114 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Ridethrough Time
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Retry/Restart
In the event of a momentary power outage, this parameter determines the length
of the Ridethrough time. During a Ridethrough, regenerative energy is used
to maintain the control circuitry settings; it is not used to drive the motor.
The Ridethrough will be maintained for the number of seconds set using this
parameter.
Note: The actual Ridethrough Time is load-dependent.
Direct Access Number — F310
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 320.0
Units — Seconds
Disable Forward Run/Disable Reverse Run
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Forward/Reverse
Disable
This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode.
If either direction is disabled (box checked), commands received for the
disabled direction will not be recognized.
If both directions are disabled (both boxes checked), the received direction
command will determine the direction of the motor rotation.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled
Direct Access Number — F311
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Scan Rate
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Retry/Restart
In the event of a momentary power outage, the output signal of the drive will
cease. Upon restoration of power, the drive will output a low-level signal that
will be used to determine the rotation speed of the rotor.
The low-level signal will start scanning the motor at FH and decrease until it
reaches 0.0 Hz or it matches the signal produced by the turning rotor. Once the
rate of rotation is determined, the drive will provide the normal output to
engage the motor from its present speed.
This parameter determines the rate at which the scanning signal goes from FH
to 0.0 Hz. See F301 for additional information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F312
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.50
Maximum — 2.50
Lock-on Rate
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Retry/Restart
After a momentary power outage, the ASD may have to startup into a spinning
motor. The Lock On Rate is the difference between the time that the RPM of
the motor is determined by the ASD and the time that the ASD outputs a drive
signal to the motor.
See F301 for additional information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F313
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.50
Maximum — 2.50
F310 F313
G7 ASD Operation Manual 115
Search Method
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Retry/Restart
In the event of a momentary power outage, this parameter may be used to set
the starting point (frequency) of the scanning signal that is used to determine
the rotor speed or this parameter may be used to select the method used to
search for the speed of the rotor. See F301 and F312 for additional information
on this parameter.
Settings:
Normal
Start from 0.0 Hz
Start from Running Frequency
Option Board (ASD-SS)
PG
Direct Access Number — F314
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Normal
Changeable During Run — No
Search Inertia
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Retry/Restart
After a momentary power loss or the momentary loss of the ST-to-CC
connection, this parameter sets the time for the commanded torque to reach its
programmed setting during the automatic restart. This function is in effect so
long as the Retry/Restart feature is enabled at F301.
Settings:
0.5 Sec. (fast)
1.0 Sec. (standard)
1.5 Sec.
2.0 Sec.
2.5 Sec.
3.0 Sec.
3.5 Sec.
4.0 Sec.
4.5 Sec.
5.0 Sec. (slow)
Direct Access Number — F315
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — No
Units — Seconds
Drooping Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter sets the effective 100% output torque level while operating in
the Drooping Control mode. This value is the upper torque limit of the motor
being driven by a given ASD while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Drooping
Drooping Control, also called Load Share, is used to share the load among
two or more mechanically coupled motors. Unlike Stall, which reduces the
output frequency in order to limit the load once the load reaches a preset level,
Drooping can decrease or increase the V/f setting of a motor to maintain a
balance between the output torque levels of mechanically coupled motors.
Because of variances in gearboxes, sheaves, belts, motors, and since the speed
of the motor is constrained by the mechanical system, one motor may
experience more load than its counterpart and may become overloaded.
Drooping Control allows the overloaded motor to slow down, thus shedding
load and encouraging a lightly-loaded motor to pick up the slack. The goal of
Drooping Control is to have the same torque ratios for mechanically coupled
motors.
Direct Access Number — F320
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
F314 F320
116 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Speed at Drooping Gain 0%
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 0% output torque gain while
operating in the Drooping Control mode. This function determines the lowest
speed that Drooping will be in effect for motors that share the same load.
Direct Access Number — F321
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 320.0
Units — Hz
Speed at Drooping Gain 100%
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 100% output torque gain while
operating in the Drooping Control mode. This function determines the speed
of the individual motors at the 100% Drooping Gain setting for motors that
share the same load.
Direct Access Number — F322
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 320.0
Units — Hz
Drooping Insensitive Torque Range
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter defines a torque range in which the Drooping Control settings
will be ignored and the programmed torque settings will be followed.
Direct Access Number — F323
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Drooping Output Filter
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter is used to set the rate of output change allowed when operating
in the Drooping Control mode.
Jerky operation may be decreased by increasing this setting.
Direct Access Number — F324
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 200.0
Load Inertia (Acc/Dec Torque)
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control ⇒ Load Inertia
This parameter is used for calculating accel/decel torque when compensating
for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F325
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 1000.0
Load Torque Filter (Acc/Dec Torque)
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control ⇒ Load Inertia
This parameter is used to set the response sensitivity when calculating the accel/
decel torque. This setting applies to load inertia compensation while operating
in the Drooping Control mode.
This parameter should be gradually adjusted to provide smoother Drooping
Control operation while operating with heavy loads.
Direct Access Number — F326
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 200.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 200.0
F321 F326
G7 ASD Operation Manual 117
Drooping Reference
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control ⇒ Drooping
Reference
This parameter sets the method to be used in determining the output torque
while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Settings:
Total Torque Calculated by the Detection Current.
Torque without Acc/Dec Torque Calculated by Detection Current.
Total Torque Calculated by the Command Current.
Torque without Acc/Dec Torque Calculated by the Command Current.
Direct Access Number — F327
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Total torque
calculated by the detection current
Changeable During Run — Yes
Light-load High-speed Operation Selection
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation
This parameter enables the Light-Load High-Speed function by selecting an
operating mode. The Light-Load High-Speed function accelerates the output
frequency of the ASD from the programmed speed to the setting established in
F341.
This parameter may be disabled.
If either of the other selections are made and configured, and after the
criteria of F331 – F333 are met, the Light-Load High-Speed function is
enabled and this parameter determines the operating mode of the Light-Load
High-Speed function.
Settings:
Disabled
Reserved
Automatic Enable - Automatic Speed (F341)
Automatic Enable - Preset Speed (Preset IDBin is OR’ed w/1000Bin)
Discrete Enable - Automatic Speed (F341) (see item 60 of Table 8 on pg. 76)
Discrete Enable - Preset Speed (Preset IDBin is OR’ed w/1000Bin) (see item
60 of Table 8 on pg. 76)
Direct Access Number — F330
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 30.0
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Switching Lower-Limit
Frequency
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation
Switching Lower-Limit Frequency
This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that, once surpassed, allows
the Light-load High-speed function to be used.
The Light-Load High-Speed function may be used if the frequency threshold
(F331) and the following conditions are met:
1) Light-Load High-Speed Operation Enable is configured at F330.
2) The output torque is less than the setting established in F335 when reaching
the frequency setting here.
Direct Access Number — F331
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 40.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 30.0
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
F327 F331
118 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Wait Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load
Wait-Time
After the time setting of F333 times out, this parameter determines the length of
time that the Light-Load High-Speed criteria must be met until the Light-
Load High-Speed function engages.
Direct Access Number — F332
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Detection Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load
Detection Time
This parameter determines the length of time that the load requirement must
meet the Light-Load High-Speed criteria before the Light-Load High-Speed
Enable (F330) is recognized.
Once recognized, the timer setting of F332 must expire to engage the Light-
Load High-Speed function.
Direct Access Number — F333
Parameter Type — Yes
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Numerical
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Heavy-Load Detection
Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation Heavy-
Load Detection Time
While operating in the Light-Load High-Speed mode, this parameter
determines the length of time that a load exceeding the Light-Load High-
Speed operation criteria may exist before the Light-Load High-Speed mode is
terminated and normal operation resumes.
Direct Access Number — F334
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Switching Load Torque During Forward-Run
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Switching Load Torque During Forward
Run
While running forward, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level
that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation may
engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Direct Access Number — F335
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 250
Units — %
Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Acceleration
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Heavy-Load Torque During Forward
Acceleration
During forward acceleration, this parameter establishes the threshold torque
level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation
may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Direct Access Number — F336
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 150
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 250
Units — %
F332 F336
G7 ASD Operation Manual 119
Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Deceleration
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Heavy-Load Torque During Forward
Deceleration
During forward deceleration, this parameter establishes the threshold torque
level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation
may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Direct Access Number — F337
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 250
Units — %
Switching Load Torque During Reverse-Run
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Switching Load Torque During Reverse
Run
While running in reverse, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level
that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation may
engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Direct Access Number — F338
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 250
Units — %
Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Acceleration
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse
Acceleration
During reverse acceleration, this parameter establishes the threshold torque
level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation
may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Direct Access Number — F339
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 150
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 250
Units — %
Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Deceleration
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse
Deceleration
During reverse deceleration, this parameter establishes the threshold torque
level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation
may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Direct Access Number — F340
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 250
Units — %
Frequency for Automatic High-Speed Operation at Light-
Load
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒
Express Speed Settings ⇒ Frequency for Automatic High-Speed
Operation at Light-Load
This parameter establishes the speed that the ASD will ramp to when operating
in the Light-Load High-Speed mode.
Direct Access Number — F341
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 80.00
Units — %
F337 F341
120 G7 ASD Operation Manual
On-Trip Powerline Switching
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Line Power Switching
This parameter Enables/Disables the On Trip Powerline Switching feature.
When enabled, the system is instructed to discontinue using the output of the
drive and to switch to the commercial power in the event of a trip.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Direct Access Number — F354
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
At-Frequency Powerline Switching
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Line Power Switching
When enabled, this parameter sets the frequency at which the At Frequency
Powerline Switching function engages. The At Frequency Powerline
Switching function commands the system to discontinue using the output of the
drive and to switch to commercial power once reaching the frequency set here.
Direct Access Number — F355
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
ASD-side Switching Wait Time
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Line Power Switching
This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before
outputting a signal to the motor once the switch-to-drive-output criteria has
been met.
Direct Access Number — F356
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Commercial Power Wait Time
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Line Power Switching
This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before
allowing commercial power to be applied to the motor once the switch-to-
commercial-power criteria has been met.
Direct Access Number — F357
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.62
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — (ASD-dependent)
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
F354 F357
G7 ASD Operation Manual 121
Commercial Power Switching Freq. Hold Time
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Line Power Switching
This parameter determines the amount of time that the connection to
commercial power is maintained once the switch-to-drive-output criteria has
been met.
Direct Access Number — F358
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Feedback Source
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables PID feedback control. When enabled, this
parameter determines the source of the motor-control feedback.
Settings:
PID Control Disabled
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) — A closed-loop control technique
that seeks error minimization by reacting to three values: One that is
proportional to the error, one that is representative of the error, and one that is
representative of the rate of change of the error.
Direct Access Number — F360
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Control Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Feedback Source Delay Filter
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the delay in the ASD output response to the motor-
control feedback signal (signal source is selected at F360).
Direct Access Number — F361
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Proportional (P) Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the degree that the Proportional function affects the
output signal. The larger the value entered here, the quicker the drive responds
to changes in feedback.
Direct Access Number — F362
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 100.0
Integral (I) Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the degree that the Integral function affects the
output signal. The smaller the value here, the more pronounced the effect of the
integral function on the output signal.
Direct Access Number — F363
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 100.0
F358 F363
122 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Upper Deviation Limits
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may
increase the output signal.
Direct Access Number — F364
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 50.00
Units — %
Lower Deviation Limits
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may
decrease the output signal.
Direct Access Number — F365
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 50.00
Units — %
Feedback Settings Differential (D) Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the degree that the Differential function affects the
output signal. The larger the value entered here, the more pronounced the affect
of the differential function for a given feedback signal level.
Direct Access Number — F366
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 2.55
Number of PG Input Pulses
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter is used to set the end-of-travel range when using an encoder on
a motor-driven positioning system (e.g., hoist/crane, etc.).
Direct Access Number — F367
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 500
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 9999
Units — Pulse Count
PG Input Phases
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter determines the type of information that is supplied by the phase
encoder.
Settings:
1 — Speed
2 — Speed and Direction
Direct Access Number — F368
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 2
Units — Phase Count
PG Disconnect Detection
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the system’s monitoring of the PG connection
status when using encoders with line driver outputs.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled
Direct Access Number — F369
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F364 F369
G7 ASD Operation Manual 123
Electronic Gear Setting
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter sets the number of pulses per revolution when using a shaft-
mounted encoder and the PG Option Board for closed loop speed control.
Direct Access Number — F370
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1000
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 100
Maximum — 4000
Position Loop Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter provides a divisor for the pulse input when operating in the
Pulse Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F371
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 4.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Position Completion Range
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
During a deceleration ramp, this parameter sets a speed range that must be
attained before the Stop command may be executed.
Direct Access Number — F372
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 4000
Frequency Limit at Position
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
While operating in the Position-Control mode and using PG feedback, this
setting determines the maximum acceleration rate in Hz/second.
Direct Access Number — F373
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 800
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8001
Units — Hz/Second
Current Control Proportional Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output
current to control speed. The larger the value entered here, the more sensitive
the drive is to changes in the received feedback.
Direct Access Number — F374
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 100.0
Maximum — 1000
F370 F374
124 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Current Control Integral Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter sets the degree and rate at which the output frequency will be
allowed to change when prompted by changes in the output current.
The larger the value entered here, the quicker/more the drive responds to
changes in feedback.
Direct Access Number — F375
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 100.0
Maximum — 1250
Speed Loop Proportional Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter sets the Proportional Gain (sensitivity) of the drive when
monitoring the PG signal to control speed. The larger the value entered here,
the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback and the
quicker it responds.
Direct Access Number — F376
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 3.2
Maximum — 1000
Speed Loop Integral Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter sets the response time of the Speed Loop Integral Gain. The
smaller the value here, the more pronounced (quicker) the effect of the integral
function.
Direct Access Number — F377
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10.0
Maximum — 200.0
Motor Counter Data
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter sets the pulses-per-revolution displayed at the Monitor screen
when using a shaft-mounted encoder for speed control. This setting is used for
display purposes only and does not affect the speed control of the system.
If zero is selected here then the setting at F370 (Electronic Gear Setting)
determines the pulses-per-revolution to be displayed at the Monitor screen.
Settings:
Selection 0 — F370 setting
Selection 1 — 256 pulses/revolution
Selection 2 — 512 pulses/revolution
Selection 3 — 1024 pulses/revolution
Selection 4 — 2048 pulses/revolution
Selection 5 — 4096 pulses/revolution
Direct Access Number — F378
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Selection 0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — Selection 0
Maximum — Selection 5
Speed Loop Parameter Ratio
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings
Contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department for information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F379
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 10.00
F375 F379
G7 ASD Operation Manual 125
Use Speed Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speed Mode
This parameter Enables/Disables the Use Speed mode. When enabled, the
system uses all of the parameter settings of the Preset Speed being run.
Otherwise, only the frequency setting is used.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Direct Access Number — F380
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #1
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #1 Preset Speed (F018).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F381
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #2
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #2 Preset Speed (F019).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F382
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #3
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #3 Preset Speed (F020).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F383
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #4
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #4 Preset Speed (F021).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F384
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #5
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #5 Preset Speed (F022).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F385
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
F380 F385
126 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Preset Speed Direction #6
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #6 Preset Speed (F023).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F386
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #7
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #7 Preset Speed (F024).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F387
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #8
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #8 Preset Speed (F287).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F388
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #9
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #9 Preset Speed (F288).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F389
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #10
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #10 Preset Speed (F289).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F390
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #11
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #11 Preset Speed (F290).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F391
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
F386 F391
G7 ASD Operation Manual 127
Preset Speed Direction #12
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #12 Preset Speed (F291).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F392
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #13
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #13 Preset Speed (F292).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F393
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #14
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #14 Preset Speed (F293).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F394
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed Direction #15
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds
Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #15 Preset Speed (F294).
Settings:
Forward
Reverse
Direct Access Number — F395
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Vector Motor Model Autotune Command
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter sets the Autotune command status.
Settings:
Autotune Disabled
Reset Motor Defaults
Enable Autotune on Run Command
Direct Access Number — F400
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Autotune Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Vector Motor Model Slip Frequency Gain
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter provides a degree of slip compensation for a given load. A
higher setting here decreases the slip allowed for a given load/ASD output ratio.
Direct Access Number — F401
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.60
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.55
F392 F401
128 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Motor Constant 1 (primary resistance)
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is the measurement of the stator resistance and is considered a
Motor Constant (unchanging). This value is used in conjunction with other
constants to tune the motor.
To use Vector Control, Automatic Torque Boost, or Automatic Energy-
saving, the Motor Constant setting (motor tuning) is required.
Direct Access Number — F402
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100,000 MΩ
Units — Ω
Motor Constant 2 (secondary resistance)
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is the measurement of the rotor resistance and is considered a
Motor Constant (unchanging). This value is used in conjunction with other
constants to tune the motor.
This setting (motor tuning) is required to use the Vector Control, Automatic
Torque Boost, or Automatic Energy-saving functions.
Direct Access Number — F403
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Open
Units — Ω
Motor Constant 3 (exciting inductance)
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to input the excitation inductance for the motor. This
value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor.
This setting (motor tuning) is required to use the Vector Control, Automatic
Torque Boost, or Automatic Energy-saving functions.
Direct Access Number — F404
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 6500.0
Units — µH
Motor Constant 4 (load inertia)
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to control the load inertia during speed changes.
Acceleration and deceleration overshoot may be reduced by increasing this
value.
This setting (motor tuning) is required to use the Vector Control, Automatic
Torque Boost, or Automatic Energy-saving functions.
Direct Access Number — F405
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Motor Constant 5 (leakage inductance)
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter provides slight increases in the output voltage of the drive at the
high speed range.
This setting (motor tuning) is required to use the Vector Control, Automatic
Torque Boost, or Automatic Energy-saving functions.
Direct Access Number — F410
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 650.0
Number of Poles of Motor
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Settings
This parameter identifies the number of motor poles.
Direct Access Number — F411
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 4
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2
Maximum — 16
F402 F411
G7 ASD Operation Manual 129
Motor Capacity
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Settings
This parameter identifies the wattage rating of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F412
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — (ASD-dependent)
Units — kW
Motor Type
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Settings
This parameter identifies the type of motor being used.
Settings:
Toshiba EQP III TEFC
Toshiba EQP III ODP
Toshiba EPACT TEFC
Toshiba EPACT ODP
Other Motor
Direct Access Number — F413
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Toshiba EQP III
TEFC
Changeable During Run — No
Motor Constant 3 Enable
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter Enables/Disables tuning of Motor Constant 3 during an
Autotune.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Direct Access Number — F414
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Enable
Changeable During Run — No
Torque Command
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Control
When operating in the Torque Control mode, this parameter allows the user to
select the source of the torque command signal.
Settings:
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
LED Keypad Option
Binary/BCD Input
Common Serial (TTL)
RS232/RS485
Communication Card
Direct Access Number — F420
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — RX
Changeable During Run — Yes
Torque Command Filter
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter reduces the motor vibration caused by large-inertia loads. A
small value will have a great effect while an increased value will have a lesser
effect.
Direct Access Number — F421
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 200.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10.0
Maximum — 200.0
F412 F421
130 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Synchronized Torque Bias Input
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Synchronized Torque Bias input
function. When enabled, this parameter identifies the source of the
Synchronized Torque Bias input signal.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
LED Keypad Option
Binary/BCD Input
Common Serial (TTL)
RS232/RS485
Communication Card
Direct Access Number — F422
Parameter Type — Selection list
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Tension Torque Bias Input
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Tension Torque Bias input function and
identifies the source of the Tension Torque Bias input signal when enabled.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
LED Keypad Option
Binary/BCD Input
Common Serial (TTL)
RS232/RS485
Communication Card
Direct Access Number — F423
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Load Sharing Gain Input
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Load Sharing Gain input function and is
enabled by selecting a Load Sharing Gain input signal source.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
LED Keypad Option
Binary/BCD Input
Common Serial (TTL)
RS232/RS485
Communication Card
Direct Access Number — F424
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
F422 F424
G7 ASD Operation Manual 131
Forward Speed Limit Input
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Speed Limit Input control
function. When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode, the
forward speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here. If Setting is
selected, the value set at F426 is used as the Forward Speed Limit input.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
Setting
Direct Access Number — F425
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Forward Speed Limit Level
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter provides a value to be used as the Forward Speed Limit setting
if Setting is selected at F425.
Direct Access Number — F426
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Reverse Speed Limit Input
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Reverse Speed Limit Input control
function. When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode, the reverse
speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here. If Setting is selected, the
value set at F428 is used as the Reverse Speed Limit input.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
Setting
Direct Access Number — F427
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Reverse Speed Limit Level
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter provides a value to be used as the Reverse Speed Limit setting
if Setting is selected at F427.
Direct Access Number — F428
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
F425 F428
132 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Torque Command Mode
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
This parameter specifies whether the torque command function is to be used in
one direction or both (F/R).
Settings:
Fixed Direction
F/R Permitted
Direct Access Number — F429
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Fixed Direction
Changeable During Run — No
Speed Limit (torque) Reference
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a
function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This
parameter sets the input terminal that will be used to control the allowable
speed variance.
Settings:
None
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
Fixed
Direct Access Number — F430
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
Speed Limit Torque Level
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a
function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This
parameter sets the targeted speed. The plus-or-minus value (range) for this
setting may be set at F432.
Direct Access Number — F431
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Speed Limit Torque Range
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a
function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This
parameter sets a plus-or-minus value (range) for the Speed Limit Torque Level
(F431).
Direct Access Number — F432
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Speed Limit Torque Recovery
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a
function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This
parameter sets the response time of the system to torque change requirements.
Direct Access Number — F433
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.20
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.50
Units — Seconds
F429 F433
G7 ASD Operation Manual 133
Power Running Torque Limit #1
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings
This parameter determines the source of the control signal for the positive
torque limit setting. If Setting is selected, the value set at F441 is used as the
Power Running Torque Limit #1 input.
Settings:
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
Setting
Direct Access Number — F440
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Setting
Changeable During Run — Yes
Driving Torque Limit #1
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Manual Torque Limit
Settings
This parameter provides a value for the Power Running Torque Limit #1
setting if Setting is selected at F440. This value provides the positive torque
upper limit for the #1 motor.
Direct Access Number — F441
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Regeneration Torque Limit #1
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings
This parameter determines the source of the Regenerative Torque Limit
control signal. If Setting is selected, the value set at F443 is used for this
parameter.
Settings:
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
Setting
Direct Access Number — F442
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Setting
Changeable During Run — Yes
Regeneration Torque Limit Setting #1
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings ⇒
Manual Settings
This parameter provides a value to be used as the Regeneration Torque Limit
#1 if Setting is selected at F442.
Direct Access Number — F443
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Driving Torque Limit #2
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Manual Torque Limit
Settings
This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the #2 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F444
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
F440 F444
134 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Regeneration Torque Limit #2
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Manual Torque Limit
Settings
This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the #2 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F445
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Driving Torque Limit #3
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Manual Torque Limit
Settings
This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the #3 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F446
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Regeneration Torque Limit #3
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Manual Torque Limit
Settings
This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the #3 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F447
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Driving Torque Limit #4
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Manual Torque Limit
Settings
This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the #4 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F448
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Regeneration Torque Limit #4
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Manual Torque Limit
Settings
This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the #4 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F449
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Torque Limit Mode
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings ⇒
Torque Limit Mode
Contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department for information on this parameter.
Settings:
Driving/Regen
Positive/Negative
Direct Access Number — F450
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Driving/Regen
Changeable During Run — No
F445 F450
G7 ASD Operation Manual 135
Torque Limit Mode (Speed Dependent)
Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings ⇒
Torque Limit Mode (Speed Dependent)
This parameter allows for either wide or very limited speed fluctuations while
operating in the Torque Control mode.
The ASD output follows the commanded speed when No Speed Cooperation
is selected and has a very limited speed fluctuation range when Standard is
selected.
Settings:
Standard
No Speed Cooperation
Direct Access Number — F451
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Standard
Changeable During Run — Yes
Continued Stall Until Trip During Power Operation
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Stall ⇒ Continuing Stall Period
This parameter allows the user to extend the Overvoltage Stall (F305) and the
Overcurrent Stall (F017) time settings.
Direct Access Number — F452
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 1.00
Units — Seconds
Stall Prevention During Regeneration
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Stall ⇒ Stall Prevention During
Regeneration
This parameter Enables/Disables the Overvoltage Stall (F305) and the
Overcurrent Stall (F017) function during regeneration only. Application-
specific conditions may occur that warrant disabling the Stall function during
regeneration.
Settings:
With Stall Prevention
Without Stall Prevention
Direct Access Number — F453
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — With Stall
Prevention.
Changeable During Run — Yes
Current Differential Gain
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒
Current Differential Gain
This parameter determines the degree that the current differential function
affects the output signal. The larger the value entered here, the more
pronounced the Current Differential Gain.
Direct Access Number — F454
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.23
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 327.6
VI/II Bias Adjust
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ VI/II ⇒ Bias
This parameter is used to fine-tune the bias of the VI/II input terminals.
Note: See note on pg. 46 for further information on the VI/II terminal.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or
decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F470
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 255
F451 F470
136 G7 ASD Operation Manual
VI/II Gain Adjust
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ VI/II ⇒ Gain
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the VI/II input terminals.
Note: See note on pg. 46 for further information on the VI/II terminal.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and either increasing
or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F471
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 255
RR Bias Adjust
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RR ⇒ Bias
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RR input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or
the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or
decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F472
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 120
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 255
RR Gain Adjust
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RR ⇒ Gain
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RR input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or
the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and either increasing
or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F473
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 61
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 255
RX Bias Adjust
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX ⇒ Bias
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or
the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or
decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F474
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 99
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 255
F471 F474
G7 ASD Operation Manual 137
RX Gain Adjust
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX ⇒ Gain
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or
the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and either increasing
or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F475
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 141
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 255
RX2 Bias Adjust
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX2 ⇒ Bias
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX2 input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or
the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or
decreasing this setting to provide a zero output from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F476
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 99
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 255
RX2 Gain Adjust
Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference
Setpoints ⇒ RX2 ⇒ Gain
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX2 input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or
the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and either increasing
or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F477
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 141
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 255
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient
This parameter determines the rate at which the excitation current is allowed to
go from zero to saturation and is enabled at F481.
Direct Access Number — F480
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 64
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
F475 F480
138 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Over Exciting Cooperation
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Over-
Exciting Cooperation
This parameter determines the method used to control the rate that the
excitation current is allowed to reach saturation. If Effective is selected, the
preset Torque Control or Speed Control settings will determine the rate that
the motor reaches excitation saturation.
Settings:
Effective
Applied by F480
Direct Access Number — F481
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Effective
Changeable During Run — Yes
Current Vector Control
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒
Control Margin Modulation ⇒ % Current Vector Control
This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation when operating in
the Current Vector Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F482
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 90.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 80.0
Maximum — 300.0
Units — %
Voltage Vector Control
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒
Control Margin Modulation ⇒ % Voltage Vector Control
This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation when operating in
the Voltage Vector Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F483
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 105.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 80.0
Maximum — 300.0
Units — %
Constant Vector Control
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒
Control Margin Modulation ⇒ % Voltage Vector Control
This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation when operating in
the Constant Vector Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F484
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 105.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 80.0
Maximum — 300.0
Units — %
Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Stall
Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone
This parameter determines the degree that the Stall function is effective while
operating the motor in the field weakening zone.
Direct Access Number — F485
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Excitation Starting Rate
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒
Excitation Starting Rate
This parameter establishes the rate of increase in the excitation current from a
zero output of the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F486
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 163.8
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1.64
Maximum — 327.6
F481 F486
G7 ASD Operation Manual 139
Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒
Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss
This parameter compensates for losses in the rotor-to-stator coupling of the
excitation and torque current energy.
Direct Access Number — F487
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 105.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒
Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time
This parameter adjusts the degree of voltage compensation during dead time by
increasing or decreasing the on-time of the programmed PWM just prior to the
start of the dead time.
Direct Access Number — F488
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 163.8
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1.64
Maximum — 327.6
Dead Time Compensation (Enable)
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Dead
Time Compensation
This parameter Enables/Disables the Dead Time Compensation function. The
Dead Time Compensation feature provides a smoothing of the on-off IGBT
signal that feeds the Gate Driver board during the off portion of the on-off
cycle.
Settings:
Enabled
Disabled
Direct Access Number — F489
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Dead-time Compensation Bias
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Dead-
time Compensation Bias
This parameter sets a bias for the Dead-time Compensation function. The
Dead-time Compensation feature provides a smoothing of the on-off IGBT
signal that feeds the Gate Driver board.
Direct Access Number — F490
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.000
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -32.768
Maximum — 32.767
Switching Frequency of Current/Voltage Control
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒
Switching Frequency between Current and Voltage Control
This parameter sets the threshold frequency at which ASD control is switched
between Current-control and Voltage -control.
Direct Access Number — F491
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 40.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10.00
Maximum — 60.00
Units — Hz
F487 F491
140 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Accel #2 Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0.0 Hz to
the Maximum Frequency for the #2 Acceleration profile. The accel/decel
pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using
F508.
This setting is also used to determine the acceleration rate of the Motorized Pot
function.
Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the
acceleration time.
Direct Access Number — F500
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Decel #2 Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4
Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the
Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #2 Deceleration profile. The accel/
decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set
using F508.
This setting is also used to determine the deceleration rate of the Motorized
Pot function.
Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the
acceleration time.
Direct Access Number — F501
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
F500 F501
G7 ASD Operation Manual 141
Accel/Decel Pattern #1
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4
Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that
controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the #1 Accel/Decel
parameter.
Settings:
Linear
S-Pattern 1
S-Pattern 2
The figures below provide a profile of the available accel/decel patterns.
Direct Access Number — F502
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Linear acceleration and deceleration is the
default pattern and is used on most
applications.
S-pattern 1 is used for applications that
require quick acceleration and deceleration.
This setting is also popular for applications that
require shock absorption at the start of
acceleration or deceleration.
S-pattern 2 acceleration and deceleration
decreases the rate of change above the base
frequency.
F502 F502
142 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Accel/Decel Pattern #2
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ 1 – #4 Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that
controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the #2 Accel/Decel
parameter.
Settings:
Linear
S-Pattern 1
S-Pattern 2
Direct Access Number — F503
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Acc/Dec Group
No path available (Direct Access Only)
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter selects the
accel/decel profile to be used during a multiple-accel/decel profile
configuration. The accel/decel setting for selections 1 – 4 may be found at
F009, F500, F510, and F514, respectively.
Settings:
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Note: If using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the Frequency
Command screen to access this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F504
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Acc/Dec Switching Frequency #1
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched
from the Accel #1 profile to the Accel #2 profile during a multiple-acceleration
profile configuration.
Direct Access Number — F505
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
S-Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
Sets the lower limit of S-pattern 1 and 2.
Direct Access Number — F506
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 25.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 50.00
Units — %
S-Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
Sets the upper limit frequency of S-pattern 1 and 2.
Direct Access Number — F507
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 25.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 50.00
Units — %
F503 F507
G7 ASD Operation Manual 143
Accel/Decel Lower Limit Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the lower limit of the Accel/Decel time.
Direct Access Number — F508
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Accel #3 Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4
Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0.0 Hz to
the Maximum Frequency for the #3 Acceleration profile. The accel/decel
pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using
F508.
Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the
acceleration time.
Direct Access Number — F510
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Decel #3 Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4
Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the
Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #3 Deceleration profile.
The accel/decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time
may be set using F508.
Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the
deceleration time.
Direct Access Number — F511
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Accel/Decel Pattern #3
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4
Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that
controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the #3 Accel/Decel
parameter.
Settings:
Linear
S-Pattern 1
S-Pattern 2
Direct Access Number — F512
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #2
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched
from the Accel #2 profile to the Accel #3 profile during a multiple-acceleration
profile configuration.
Direct Access Number — F513
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F508 F513
144 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Accel #4 Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4
Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0.0 Hz to
the Maximum Frequency for the #4 Acceleration profile. The accel/decel
pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using
F508.
Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the
acceleration time.
Direct Access Number — F514
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Decel #4 Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4
Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the
Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #4 Deceleration profile. The accel/
decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set
using F508.
Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the
deceleration time.
Direct Access Number — F515
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Accel/Decel Pattern #4
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4
Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that
controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the #4 Accel/Decel
parameter.
Settings:
Linear
S-Pattern 1
S-Pattern 2
Direct Access Number — F516
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #3
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched
from the Accel #3 profile to the Accel #4 profile during a multiple-acceleration
profile configuration.
Direct Access Number — F517
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F514 F517
G7 ASD Operation Manual 145
Pattern Run
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Pattern Run
This parameter Enables/Disables the Pattern Run mode. When enabled, this
feature allows up to 15 Preset Speeds to be run sequentially for a user-
determined duration and number of times.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Pattern Run Description
User-defined Preset Speeds are labeled 1 – 15 (see F018). The ID number of
any one of the fifteen frequencies (1 – 15) may be entered into the Speed # field
of the Pattern Run screen and run for the number of times entered into the
Repeat field (see F530). The execution of grouped Preset Speeds in this
manner is called a Pattern Run.
Skip may be selected to ignore a Speed # field.
Pattern Run Setup
1. Configure an unused discrete input terminal for Pattern #1 (2, 3, or 4). This
terminal will initiate the selected Pattern Run. The input terminal settings
may be configured via Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input
Terminals (see Table 8 on pg. 76 for available input terminal settings).
2. Enable the Pattern Run mode of operation via Program ⇒ Pattern Run
Control Parameters ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Enable/Disable (check box).
3. Configure the Preset Speeds that are to be used as the Group Speed set of
frequencies via Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset
Speeds (e.g., Preset Speed #1 on pg. 66).
4. Configure the Group Speeds by associating the Preset Speeds that are to
be enabled and grouped (from step 3) as Group Speed 1 (2, 3, or 4) via
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds. Set the Repeat
field to the number of times that the selected group is to be run. Set unused
speed settings to Skip.
5. From the Remote mode (Local|Remote light is off), initiate a Run
command (e.g., F and/or R terminal On).
6. Connect the input terminal that was configured in step 1 to CC and the
Pattern Run will start and continue as programmed. Open the connection
to stop the Pattern Run before its conclusion.
See F018 on pg. 66 for further information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F520
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Run Mode Restart Command
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Pattern Run
This parameter sets the start condition of subsequent Pattern Runs after the
initial Pattern Run has been terminated or has completed its programming.
Settings:
Reset
Continue
Direct Access Number — F521
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F520 F521
146 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Group #1 Speed Repeat Factor
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
This parameter sets the number of times that the pattern defined in Group #1
will be run.
Direct Access Number — F530
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — Infinite
Group #1 Speed #1 (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Up to four groups of Preset Speeds may be setup and run from this screen. The
Preset Speed numbers (1 – 15) may be entered into the Speed # field to be run
for the number of times entered into the Repeat field (0 – 254) or forever by
selecting Infinite. Running multiple Preset Speeds as a group is called a
Pattern Run.
This parameter allows the user to run the Preset Speeds 1 – 15 as a group and
is identified as Group #1.
Skip may be selected to ignore a Preset Speed entry.
See F520 for further information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F531
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — No
Group #1 Speed #2
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F532
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2
Changeable During Run — No
Group #1 Speed #3
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F533
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 3
Changeable During Run — No
Group #1 Speed #4
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F534
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 4
Changeable During Run — No
Group #1 Speed #5
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F535
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Group #1 Speed #6
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F536
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 6
Changeable During Run — No
Group #1 Speed #7
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F537
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 7
Changeable During Run — No
F530 F537
G7 ASD Operation Manual 147
Group #1 Speed #8
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F538
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 8
Changeable During Run — No
Group #2 Speed Repeat Factor
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of
Group #2 will be run; 0 – 254 or Infinite.
Direct Access Number — F540
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — No
Group #2 Speed #1
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F541
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 9
Changeable During Run — No
Group #2 Speed #2
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F542
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — No
Group #2 Speed #3
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F543
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 11
Changeable During Run — No
Group #2 Speed #4
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F544
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 12
Changeable During Run — No
Group #2 Speed #5
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F545
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 13
Changeable During Run — No
Group #2 Speed #6
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F546
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 14
Changeable During Run — No
Group #2 Speed #7
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F547
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 15
Changeable During Run — No
Group #2 Speed #8
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F548
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
F538 F548
148 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Group #3 Speed Repeat Factor
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of
Group #3 will be run; 0 – 254 or Infinite.
Direct Access Number — F550
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — No
Group #3 Speed #1
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F551
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — No
Group #3 Speed #2
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F552
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2
Changeable During Run — No
Group #3 Speed #3
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F553
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 3
Changeable During Run — No
Group #3 Speed #4
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F554
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 4
Changeable During Run — No
Group #3 Speed #5
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F555
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Group #3 Speed #6
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F556
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 6
Changeable During Run — No
Group #3 Speed #7
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F557
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 7
Changeable During Run — No
Group #3 Speed #8
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F558
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 8
Changeable During Run — No
Group #4 Speed Repeat Factor
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of
Group #4 will be run; 1 – 254 or Infinite.
Direct Access Number — F560
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — No
F550 F560
G7 ASD Operation Manual 149
Group #4 Speed #1
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F561
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 9
Changeable During Run — No
Group #4 Speed #2
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F562
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — No
Group #4 Speed #3
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F563
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 11
Changeable During Run — No
Group #4 Speed #4
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F564
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 12
Changeable During Run — No
Group #4 Speed #5
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F565
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 13
Changeable During Run — No
Group #4 Speed #6
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F566
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 14
Changeable During Run — No
Group #4 Speed #7
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F567
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 15
Changeable During Run — No
Group #4 Speed #8
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds
Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).
Direct Access Number — F568
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #1 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 1
In conjunction with the setting of F585, this parameter is used to set the run-
time of Preset Speed 1 when used as part of a Pattern Run.
Settings:
Time From Start
Time From Reach
No Limit
Until Next Step
Direct Access Number — F570
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
F561 F570
150 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Pattern #2 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 2
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F571
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #3 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 3
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F572
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #4 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 4
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F573
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #5 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 5
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F574
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #6 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 6
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F575
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #7 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 7
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F576
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #8 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 8
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F577
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #9 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 9
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F578
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #10 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 10
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F579
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #11 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 11
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F580
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
F571 F580
G7 ASD Operation Manual 151
Pattern #12 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 12
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F581
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #13 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 13
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F582
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #14 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 14
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F583
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern #15 Characteristics (Pattern Run)
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 15
Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).
Direct Access Number — F584
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Time From Start
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Run #1 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 1
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #1 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F585
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #2 Continuation Mode Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 2
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #2 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F586
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #3 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 3
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #3 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F587
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #4 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 4
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #4 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F588
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
F581 F588
152 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Pattern Run #5 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 5
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #5 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F589
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #6 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 6
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #6 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F590
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #7 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 7
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #7 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F591
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #8 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 8
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #8 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F592
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #9 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 9
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #9 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F593
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #10 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 10
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #10 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F594
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
F589 F594
G7 ASD Operation Manual 153
Pattern Run #11 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 11
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #11 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F595
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #12 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 12
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #12 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F596
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #13 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 13
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #13 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F597
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #14 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 14
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #14 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F598
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
Pattern Run #15 Run-Time Setting
Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 15
This parameter sets the run-time value for the #15 Preset Speed mode when
used as part of a Pattern Run.
Direct Access Number — F599
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 8000
Units — Seconds
F595 F599
154 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Electronic Thermal Protection #1
Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #1
The Motor #1 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor
overload current level for motor set #1. This value is entered as either a
percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps or it may be set
as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the motor may be
entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement (see F701 to
change the display unit).
Electronic Thermal Protection settings (#1 – #4) will be displayed in Amps if
the EOI display units are set to V/A rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F600
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Overcurrent Stall Level
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Stall
This parameter specifies the output current level at which the output frequency
is reduced in an attempt to prevent a trip. The overcurrent level is entered as a
percentage of the maximum rating of the drive.
Note: Parameter F017 (Soft Stall) must be enabled to use this feature.
Direct Access Number — F601
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.0
Units — %
Trip Save at Power Down Enable
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Trip Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the Trip Save at Power Down setting. When
enabled, this feature logs the trip event and retains the trip information when the
system powers down. The trip information may be viewed from the Monitor
screen.
When disabled, the trip information will be cleared when the system powers
down.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Direct Access Number — F602
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Emergency Off Mode Settings
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Emergency Off Settings
This parameter determines the method used to stop the motor in the event that
an Emergency Off command is received and the system is configured to use
this feature.
This setting may also be associated with the FL terminals to allow the FL relay
to change states when an EOFF condition occurs by setting the FL terminal to
Fault FL (all) (see F132).
Note: A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with
the ASD. Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD
alone.
Settings:
Coast Stop
Deceleration Stop
DC Injection Braking Stop
Direct Access Number — F603
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Coast Stop
Changeable During Run — No
F600 F603
G7 ASD Operation Manual 155
Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Emergency Off Settings
When DC Injection is used as a function of receiving an Emergency Off
command (F603), this parameter determines the time that the DC Injection
braking is applied to the motor.
Direct Access Number — F604
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Output Phase Loss Detection
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Phase Loss
This parameter Enables/Disables the monitoring of each phase of the 3-phase
output signal (U, V, or W) of the ASD. If either line is missing, inactive, or not
of the specified level, the ASD incurs a trip.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Direct Access Number — F605
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
OL Reduction Starting Frequency
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overload
This parameter is used to reduce the start frequency during very low-speed
motor operation. During very low-speed operation the cooling efficiency of the
motor decreases. Lowering the start frequency aides in minimizing the
generated heat.
Direct Access Number — F606
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 6.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Motor 150% OL Time Limit
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overload
This parameter establishes a time that the motor may operate at 150% of its
rated current before tripping. This setting applies the time/150% reference to
the individual settings of each motor (e.g., this setting references 150% of the
F600 setting for the #1 motor).
The unit will trip sooner than the time entered here if the overload is greater
than 150%.
Direct Access Number — F607
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 600
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 2400
Units — Seconds
Inrush Current Suppression
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Soft Start
The startup inrush current may be suppressed for up to 2.5 seconds. This
parameter determines the length of the inrush current suppression.
Direct Access Number — F608
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.30
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.30
Maximum — 2.50
Units — Seconds
Interlock with ST
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Soft Start
This parameter Enables/Disables the ST-to-CC connection dependency on the
successful completion of a Soft Start. If enabled, the ST-to-CC connection will
happen only after a successful Soft Start.
Direct Access Number — F609
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F604 F608
156 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Low Current Trip
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Low Current Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the low-current trip feature.
When enabled, the drive will trip on a low-current fault if the output current of
the drive falls below the level defined at F611 and remains there for the time set
at F612.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Direct Access Number — F610
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Low Current Trip Threshold
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Low Current Settings
When the low-current monitor is enabled, this function sets the low-current trip
threshold. The threshold value is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating
of the drive.
Direct Access Number — F611
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Low Current Trip Threshold Time
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Low Current Settings
When the low-current monitor is enabled, this function sets the time that the
low-current condition must exist to cause a trip.
Direct Access Number — F612
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Units — Seconds
Short Circuit Test
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Arm Short Check Settings
This parameter determines when the system will perform an Output Short
Circuit test.
Settings:
Every Run
Every Powerup
Direct Access Number — F613
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Every Run
Changeable During Run — No
Short Circuit Test Duration
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Arm Short Check Settings
This parameter sets the pulse width of the ASD output pulse that is applied to
the motor during an Output Short Circuit test.
Direct Access Number — F614
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 100
Units — µS
F610 F614
G7 ASD Operation Manual 157
Overtorque Trip
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overtorque Parameters
This parameter Enables/Disables the Over Torque Tripping function.
When enabled, the ASD trips if an output torque value greater than the setting
of F616 or F617 exists for a time longer than the setting of F618.
When disabled, the ASD does not trip due to overtorque conditions.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Direct Access Number — F615
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level (Positive Torque)
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overtorque Parameters
This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for
overtorque tripping. This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque
of the drive.
Direct Access Number — F616
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 150.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level (Negative Torque)
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overtorque Parameters
This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for
overtorque tripping during regeneration. This setting is a percentage of the
maximum rated torque of the drive.
Direct Access Number — F617
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 150.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Overtorque Detection Time
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overtorque Parameters
This parameter sets the amount of time that the overtorque condition may
exceed the tripping threshold level set at F616 and F617 before a trip occurs.
Direct Access Number — F618
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.50
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — Seconds
Cooling Fan Control
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Cooling Fan Settings
This parameter sets the cooling fan run-time command.
Settings:
Automatic
Always On
Direct Access Number — F620
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Automatic
Changeable During Run — Yes
F615 F620
158 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Cumulative Run Timer
This parameter sets a run-time value that, once exceeded, closes a contact. The
output signal may be used to control external equipment or used to engage a
brake.
Note: The time displayed is 1/10th of the actual time (0.1 hr. = 1.0 hr.).
Direct Access Number — F621
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 175.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 999.9
Units — Hours (X 100)
Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Abnormal Speed Settings
This parameter sets the time that an overspeed condition must exist to cause a
trip.
Direct Access Number — F622
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 100.0
Units — Seconds
Overspeed Detection Frequency Range
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Abnormal Speed Settings
This parameter sets the upper level of the Base Frequency range that, once
exceeded, will cause an Overspeed Detected alert.
Direct Access Number — F623
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Abnormal Speed Settings
This parameter sets the lower level of the Base Frequency range that, once
exceeded, will cause a Speed Drop Detected alert.
Direct Access Number — F624
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Overvoltage Stall Level (fast)
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Stall
This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that, once exceeded,
will cause an Overvoltage Stall. An Overvoltage Stall increases the output
frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to
prevent an Overvoltage Trip.
If the overvoltage condition persists for over 250 µS, an Overvoltage Trip will
be incurred.
Note: This feature may increase deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F625
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.00
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
F621 F625
G7 ASD Operation Manual 159
Overvoltage Stall Level
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Stall
This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that, once exceeded,
will cause an Overvoltage Stall. An Overvoltage Stall increases the output
frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to
prevent an Overvoltage Trip.
If the overvoltage condition persists for over 4 mS, an Overvoltage Trip will
be incurred.
Note: This feature may increase deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F626
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.0
Maximum — 250.0
Units — %
Undervoltage Trip
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
This parameter Enables/Disables the Undervoltage Trip function.
With this parameter Enabled, the ASD will trip if the undervoltage condition
persists for a time greater than the F628 setting.
A user-selected contact may be actuated if so configured.
If Disabled the ASD will stop and not trip; the FL contact is not active.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled (box checked)
Direct Access Number — F627
Parameter Type — Check Box
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Undervoltage Detection Time
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
This parameter sets the time that the undervoltage condition must exist to cause
an Undervoltage trip when this function is enabled at F627.
Direct Access Number — F628
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.03
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Undervoltage Stall level
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
This parameter sets the low end of the DC bus voltage threshold that, once it
drops below this setting, will activate the setting of F302 (Ridethrough Mode).
Activation may be the result of a momentary power loss or an excessive load on
the bus voltage. Once activated, the system will attempt to maintain the bus
voltage level set here until the motor stops.
Note: This feature may decrease deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F629
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Brake Trouble Internal Timer
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Brake Fault Timer
This parameter is used in conjunction with the discrete input terminal setting
64 [System Consistent Sequence (BA: braking answer)] (see item 64 of Table
8 on pg. 76 for further information on this feature).
After activating the discrete input terminal System Consistent Sequence (B:
braking release), the setting of this parameter defines a window of time in
which 1) a Braking Answer response must be received or 2) the brake must
release.
Should this timer setting expire before the Braking Answer is returned or the
brake releases, a Brake Fault is incurred. Otherwise, the brake releases and
normal motor operations resume.
Direct Access Number — F630
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
F626 F630
160 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Position Difference Limit
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings ⇒ Position
Difference Limit
While operating in the Position Control mode, this parameter sets the
maximum allowed difference between the commanded position and resulting
position as indicated by encoder pulses.
Direct Access Number — F631
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 16.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6553
Release After Run Timer
Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Brake Fault Timer
This parameter sets the time that the brake will hold after the Run command
criteria has been met.
Direct Access Number — F632
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.50
Units — Seconds
Earth Fault Alarm Level
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Earth Fault Alarm Level
This parameter sets the threshold level (%) that must be exceeded to meet the
Earth Fault Alarm activation criteria.
Direct Access Number — F640
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Earth Fault Alarm Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Earth Fault Alarm Time
In the event that the Earth Fault Alarm activation criteria is met, a timer
begins to count down to zero. Upon reaching zero, the Earth Fault Alarm is
activated.
This parameter sets the start-time of the count-down timer.
Direct Access Number — F641
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.50
Units — Seconds
Earth Fault Trip Level
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Earth Fault Trip Level
This parameter sets the threshold level (%) that must be exceeded to meet the
Earth Fault Trip activation criteria.
Direct Access Number — F642
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Earth Fault Trip Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Earth Fault Trip Time
In the event that the Earth Fault Trip activation criteria is met, a timer begins
to count down to zero. Upon reaching zero, the Earth Fault Trip is activated.
This parameter sets the start-time of the count-down timer.
Direct Access Number — F643
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.50
Units — Seconds
F631 F643
G7 ASD Operation Manual 161
Acc/Dec Base Frequency Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Analog Input Functions
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external
adjustment of the Base Frequency. When enabled, either VI/II or RR may be
used as an input source for the modification of the Base Frequency setting.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
Direct Access Number — F650
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Upper Limit Frequency Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Analog Input Functions
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external
adjustment of the Upper Limit. When enabled, either VI/II or RR may be used
as an input source for the modification of the Upper Limit setting.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
Direct Access Number — F651
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Acceleration Time Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Analog Input Functions
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external
adjustment of the Acceleration Time. Selecting either VI/II or RR enables this
feature. The selected input is used as a multiplier of the programmed
Acceleration Time setting. The multiplication factor may be from 1 to 10.
Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
Direct Access Number — F652
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Deceleration Time Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Analog Input Functions
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external
adjustment of the Deceleration Time. Selecting either VI/II or RR enables this
feature. The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed
Deceleration Time setting.
Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
Direct Access Number — F653
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
F650 F653
162 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Torque Boost Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Analog Input Functions
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external
adjustment of the Torque Boost setting. Selecting either VI/II or RR enables
this feature. The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Torq ue
Boost setting.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
Direct Access Number — F654
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Frequency Override Additive Input
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Override Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external
adjustment of the Output Frequency.
Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature. The selected
input is used as a modifier of the programmed Output Frequency.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
LED Keypad (option)
Binary/BCD Input
Common Serial (TTL)
RS232/RS485
Communication Card
Motorized Pot
Pulse Input 1
Direct Access Number — F660
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Frequency Override Multiplying Input
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Override Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external
adjustment of the Output Frequency.
Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature. The selected
input is used as a multiplier of the programmed Output Frequency.
If operating using the LED Keypad Option and Setting is selected, the value
entered at F729 is used as the multiplier.
Settings:
Disabled
VI/II
RR
RX
RX2 (option)
Setting (LED Keypad Option Only)
Direct Access Number — F661
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F654 F661
G7 ASD Operation Manual 163
AM Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ AM
This setting determines the output function of the AM analog output terminal.
This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the
magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments
for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 61.
Note: To read voltage at this terminal a 100 – 500Ω resistor is
required and must be connected from AM (+) to AM (-). The
voltage is read across the 100 – 500Ω resistor.
Current may be read by connecting an ammeter from AM (+) to
AM (-).
The AM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1/1024. The AM
Terminal Adjustment (F671) must be used to calibrate the output signal for a
proper response. SW-1 may be switched to allow for the full-range output to be
either 0 – 1 mA or 4 – 20 mA when providing an output current, or either 0 – 1
or 1 to 7.5 volts when providing an output voltage at this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F670
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Current
Changeable During Run — Yes
AM Terminal Adjustment
Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ AM
This function is used to calibrate the AM analog output terminal.
To calibrate the AM analog output, connect a meter (current or voltage) as
described at F670. With the drive running at a known frequency, adjust this
parameter (F671) until the running frequency produces the desired DC level
output at the AM terminal.
Direct Access Number — F671
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
Analog 1 Terminal Setting
Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ Analog 1
This parameter sets the Analog 1 multifunction programmable terminal to 1 of
31 possible functions and is available on the ASD Multicom option board only.
Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 61.
Direct Access Number — F672
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Voltage
Changeable During Run — Yes
Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment
Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ Analog 1
This parameter adjusts the coefficient of the Analog 1 circuit to obtain an
output that corresponds with a known input.
This function is used in the calibration of external signal measuring devices
(DVM, counters, etc.).
Direct Access Number — F673
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
Analog 2 Terminal Setting
Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ Analog 2
This parameter sets the Analog 2 multifunction programmable terminal to 1 of
31 possible functions and is available on the ASD Multicom option board only.
Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 61.
Direct Access Number — F674
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Post-compensation
Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
F670 F674
164 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment
Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ Analog 2
This parameter adjusts the coefficient of the circuit to obtain an output that
corresponds with a known input.
This function is used in the calibration of external signal measuring devices
(DVM, counters, etc.).
Direct Access Number — F675
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
FP Terminal Setting
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ FP
This parameter commands the multifunction programmable FP terminal to
monitor the value of 1 of 31 possible system functions. As the monitored
function changes in magnitude or frequency, the pulse count of the FP output
pulse train changes in direct proportion to changes in the monitored function.
As the monitored value goes up so does the pulse count of the FP output.
Note: The duty cycle of the output pulse train remains at 65 ±5.0 µS.
Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 61.
Direct Access Number — F676
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
FP Terminal Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ FP
This parameter sets the full-scale reading of the FP Terminal. The full-scale
reading of the monitored variable selected in F676 may be set here.
Direct Access Number — F677
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 3.840
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1.000
Maximum — 43.200
Units — kHz
Display Units for Voltage and Current
Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒ Display Units
This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values
displayed on the EOI.
Settings:
%
V/A
Direct Access Number — F701
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — %
Changeable During Run — Yes
Hz Per User-defined Unit
Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒ Display Units
This parameter allows the user to input a quantity to be displayed on the EOI
that is proportional to the output frequency of the drive.
This feature is useful when the output of a process is moved along at a rate that
is proportional to the output frequency of the drive.
Direct Access Number — F702
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.0
Units — Hz/UDU
Frequency Display Resolution
Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒ Display Units
The parameter sets the number of decimal places to be displayed during non-
Accel/Decel functions.
Direct Access Number — F703
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 0.01
F675 F703
G7 ASD Operation Manual 165
Accel/Decel Special Display Resolution
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the number of decimal places to be displayed for Accel/
Decel functions.
Direct Access Number — F704
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 0.01
Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform
Initialization
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒
Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform Initialization
This parameter Enables/Disables the ability to initialize user parameters during
a Type Form initialization.
Settings:
Allowed
Prohibited
Direct Access Number — F709
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Allowed
Changeable During Run — Yes
V/f Group
No path available (Direct Access Only)
While operating using the LED Keypad Option 1 of 4 V/f groups may be
selected and run. Each V/f group is comprised of 4 user-defined variables: Base
Frequency, Base Frequency Voltage, Manual Torque Boost, and Electronic
Thermal Protection. Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found
in this section (Direct Access Parameter Information).
Settings:
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Note: If using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the Frequency
Command screen to access this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F720
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Stop Pattern
No path available (Direct Access Only)
While operating using the LED Keypad Option the Stop Pattern parameter
determines the method used to stop the motor when the stop command is issued
via a Stop command from the LED Keypad.
The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system that is setup at
F304 or the DC Injection Braking system that is setup at F250, F251, and
F252.
The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the
inertia of the load.
Settings:
Decel Stop
Coast Stop
Note: The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off
settings of F603. If using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the
Frequency Command screen to access this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F721
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Decel Stop
Changeable During Run — Yes
F704 F721
166 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Torque Limit Group
No path available (Direct Access Only)
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter is used to select
1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply to the active motor. The settings of
profiles 1 – 4 may be setup at F441, F444, F446, and F448, respectively.
Settings:
1
2
3
4
Note: If using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the Frequency
Command screen to access this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F723
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Feedback in Panel Mode
No path available (Direct Access Only)
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter Enables/
Disables PID feedback control.
Settings:
Enabled
Disabled
Note: If using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the Frequency
Command screen to access this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F724
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
LED Option Override Multiplication Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Override Control
If operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter provides a value to
be used in the event that Setting is selected for the Frequency Override
Multiplying Input (F661).
Direct Access Number — F729
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.00
Maximum — 100.00
LOD Control and Stopping Method
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function
⇒ LOD
Enables/Disables the Low Output Disable function and, if enabled, selects a
stopping method.
Settings:
Disabled
Enabled — Decel Stop
Enabled — Coast Stop
Direct Access Number — F731
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
LOD Start Level (Hz)
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function
⇒ LOD Start Level (Hz)
The Low Output Disable Start Level sets the output frequency threshold that,
if exceeded, will initiate the LOD function if properly configured.
Direct Access Number — F732
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq.
Units — Hz
F723 F732
G7 ASD Operation Manual 167
LOD Start Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function
⇒ LOD Start Time
The Low Output Disable Start Time sets the amount of time that the LOD
Start Level criteria must be met and maintained for the LOD function to be
initiated.
Direct Access Number — F733
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 3600.0
Units — Seconds
LOD Setpoint Boost (Hz)
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function
⇒ LOD Setpoint Boost (Hz)
The Low Output Disable feature adds the user-input frequency value to the
commanded frequency.
Direct Access Number — F734
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq.
Units — Hz
LOD Boost Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function
⇒ LOD Boost Time
The Low Output Disable Boost Time sets the on-time timer for the LOD
Boost function.
Once expired, the LOD Boost function ceases.
Direct Access Number — F735
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 3600.0
Units — Seconds
LOD Feedback Level (Hz)
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function
⇒ LOD Feedback Level (Hz)
The Low Output Disable Feedback Level sets a frequency level that, until the
output of the ASD drops below this setting, the Restart Delay Timer does not
start.
Direct Access Number — F736
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq.
Units — Hz
LOD Restart Delay Time
Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function
⇒ LOD Restart Delay Time
The Low Output Disable Restart Delay Time sets the time that, once expired
and all standard ASD requirements are met, normal ASD operation resumes.
Direct Access Number — F737
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 3600.0
Units — Seconds
Communication Baud Rate (logic)
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the Baud Rate of the communications link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F800
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 9600
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1200
Maximum — 9600
Units — BPS
F733 F800
168 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Parity
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the Parity setting of the communications link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
No Parity
Even Parity
Odd Parity
Direct Access Number — F801
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Even Parity
Changeable During Run — Yes
ASD Number
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
assigning an identification (ID) number to each ASD in the communications
network.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F802
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
RS232/RS485 Communications Time Out Time
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
setting the time that no activity may exist over the communications link before
the link is severed (Time Out).
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F803
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — Seconds
F801 F803
G7 ASD Operation Manual 169
RS232/RS485 Communications Time-Out Action
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
determining the action to be taken in the event of a time-out (Time-Out
Action).
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the drive.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
No Action
Alarm
Trip
Direct Access Number — F804
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Trip
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communication Interval
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
This parameter sets the Common Serial response delay time.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F805
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.00
Units — Seconds
TTL Master Output
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
In a master/follower configuration, this setting determines the output parameter
of the master ASD that will be used to control the applicable follower ASDs.
Note: Select No Follower if F826 is configured as a Master Output
controller. Otherwise, an EOI failure will result.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
No Follower (normal operation)
Frequency Reference
Output Command Frequency
Torque Command
Output Torque Command
Direct Access Number — F806
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — No Follower (normal
operation)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F804 F806
170 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Frequency Point Selection
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Reference Adjust
This parameter selects the communications reference for scaling.
See F811 — F814 for further information on this setting.
Note: Scaling the communications signal is not required for all
applications.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
Disabled
Common Serial (TTL)
RS232/RS485
Communication Card
Direct Access Number — F810
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Reference Setpoint #1 (%)
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Reference Adjust
When enabled at F810, this parameter is used to allow the user to set the gain
and bias of the speed control input to the drive when the speed control signal is
received via the source selected at F810.
Gain and Bias Settings
When operating in the Speed Control mode and using one of the control
sources from Settings above, the settings that determine the gain and bias
properties of the input signal are:
•Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #1 (frequency)
(F812),
• the communications input signal value that represents
Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #1 (frequency): F811,
•Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #2 (frequency)
(F814), and
• the communications input signal value that represents
Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #2 (frequency): F813.
Once set, as the input signal value changes, the output frequency of the drive
will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets the Communications Reference input value that represents
Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #1 (frequency). This value is
entered as 0 to 100% of the Communications Reference input value range.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F811
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
F810 F811
G7 ASD Operation Manual 171
Communications Speed Setpoint #1 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications
Reference speed control input.
See F811 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #1.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F812
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Communications Reference Setpoint #2 (%)
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications
Reference speed control input.
See F811 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets the Communications Reference input value that represents
Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #2 (frequency). This value is
entered as 0 to 100% of the Communications Reference input value range.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F813
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Communications Speed Setpoint #2 (frequency)
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications
Reference speed control input.
See F811 for further information on this setting.
This parameter sets the Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #2.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F814
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
RS232/RS485 Baud Rate
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
This parameter sets the RS232/RS485 baud rate.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
Direct Access Number — F820
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 9600
Changeable During Run — Yes
F812 F820
172 G7 ASD Operation Manual
RS232/RS485 Wire Count
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
This parameter sets the communications protocol to the 2 or 4 wire method.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
2 wire
4 wire
Direct Access Number — F821
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 4
Changeable During Run — Yes
RS232/RS485 Response Delay Time
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
This parameter sets the RS232/RS485 response delay time.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F825
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.00
Units — Seconds
RS232/RS485 Master Output
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Settings
In a master/follower configuration, this setting determines the output parameter
of the master ASD that will be used to control the applicable follower ASDs.
Note: Select No Follower if F806 is configured as a Master Output
controller. Otherwise, an EOI failure will result.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
No Follower (normal operation)
Frequency Reference
Output Command Frequency
Torque Command
Output Torque Command
Direct Access Number — F826
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — No Follower (normal
operation)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communication Error
Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication
Error
In the event of a communication error during a transmission, the command that
was transmitted may be cleared or held.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
Command Request Cleared
Command Request Held
Direct Access Number — F830
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Command Request
Cleared
Changeable During Run — Yes
F821 F830
G7 ASD Operation Manual 173
Alarms, Trips, and Troubleshooting
Alarms and Trips
This section lists the available user-notification codes of the EOI display and provides information that
assists the user in the event that a Fault is incurred. The User Notification codes are displayed as an
indication that a system function or system condition is active (i.e., ATN,ATN2, DB, and DBON). The
code is displayed on the EOI for the duration of the activation.
If a user setting or an ASD parameter has been exceeded, or if a data transfer function produces an
unexpected result, a condition that is referred to as a Fault is incurred.
An Alarm is an indication that a Fault is imminent if existing operating conditions continue unchanged.
An Alarm may be associated with an output terminal to notify the operator of the condition remotely,
close a contact, or engage a brake. At the least, an Alarm will cause an alarm code to appear on the EOI
display. Table 10 lists the 16 possible Alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the G7
ASD.
In the event that the condition that caused the Alarm does not return to its normal operating level within a
specified time, the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred (Fault and Trip are sometimes used
interchangeably). A Trip is a safety feature, and is the result of a Fault, that disables the ASD system in
the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning, or one or more of the variables listed below
exceeds its normal range (time and/or magnitude).
• Current,
• Voltage,
•Speed,
• Temperature,
• Torque, or
• Load.
See Table 12 on pg. 176 for a listing of the potential Trips and the associated probable causes.
The operating conditions at the time of the trip may be used to help determine the cause of the trip. Listed
below are operating conditions that may be used to assist the operator in correcting the problem or that the
ASD operator should be prepared to discuss when contacting Toshiba’s Customer Support for assistance.
• What trip information is displayed?
• Is this a new installation?
• Has the system ever worked properly and what are the recent modifications (if any)?
• What is the ASD/Motor size?
• What is the CPU version and revision level?
• What is the EOI version?
• Does the ASD trip when accelerating, running, decelerating, or when not running?
• Does the ASD reach the commanded frequency?
• Does the ASD trip without the motor attached?
• Does ASD trip with an unloaded motor?
174 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Alarms
Table 10 lists the alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the G7 ASD. Each alarm code
listed is accompanied by a description and a possible cause. In the event that the source of the malfunction
cannot be determined, contact your Toshiba Sales Representative for further information on the condition
and for an appropriate course of action.
The Alarms are listed in the top-down order that they are checked for activation. Only the first to be
detected will be displayed on the Frequency Command screen.
Table 10. G7 Alarms.
EOI
Display Function Description Possible Causes
CM1 Comm1 Error Internal communications error. • Improperly programmed ASD.
• Improper communications settings.
• Improperly connected cables.
CM2 Comm2 Error External communications error.
EMG Emergency Off Output signal from the ASD is
terminated and a brake may be
applied if so configured.
• Stop|Reset pressed twice at the EOI.
• EOFF command received remotely.
• ASD reset required.
MOFF Main
Undervoltage
Undervoltage condition at the
3-phase AC input to the ASD.
• Low 3-phase utility voltage.
OC Over Current ASD output current greater than
F601 setting.
• Defective IGBT (U, V, or W).
• ASD output to the motor is connected incorrectly.
Disconnect the motor and retry.
• ASD output phase-to-phase short.
• The ASD is starting into a spinning motor.
• Motor/machine jammed.
• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is starting or
while running.
• Accel/Decel time is too short.
• Voltage Boost setting is too high.
• Load fluctuations.
• ASD operating at an elevated temperature.
*OH Overheat ASD ambient temperature
excessive.
• ASD is operating at an elevated temperature.
• ASD is too close to heat-generating equipment.
• Cooling fan vent is obstructed (see Mounting the ASD
on pg. 18).
• Cooling fan is inoperative.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
OJ Timer Run-time counter exceeded. •Type Reset required; select Clear run timer.
* Reset ignored if active.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 175
*OLI ASD Overload Load requirement in excess of
the capability of the ASD.
• The carrier frequency is too high.
• An excessive load.
• Acceleration time is too short.
• DC damping rate is set too high.
• The motor is starting into a spinning load after a
momentary power failure.
• The ASD is improperly matched to the application.
OLM Motor Overload Load requirement in excess of
the capability of the motor.
• V/f parameter improperly set.
• Motor is locked.
• Continuous operation at low speed.
• The load is in excess of what the motor can deliver.
*OLR Resistor
Overload
Excessive current at the
Dynamic Braking Resistor.
• Deceleration time is too short.
• DBR configuration improperly set.
*OP Overvoltage DC bus voltage exceeds
specifications.
• ASD attempting to start into a spinning motor after a
momentary power loss.
• Incoming utility power is above the specified range.
• Decel time is too short.
• Voltage spikes at the 3-phase input; install inductive
filter.
• DBR required.
• DBR resistance value is too high.
• DBR function is turned off.
• Overvoltage Stall feature is turned off.
• System is regenerating.
• Load instability.
• Disable the Ridethrough function (F302).
OT Overtorque Torque requirement in excess of
the setting of F616 or F617 for a
time longer than the setting of
F618.
• ASD is not correctly matched to the application.
•F616 or F617 setting is too low.
• Obstructed load.
*POFF Control
Undervoltage
Undervoltage condition at the 5,
15, or the 24 VDC supply.
• Defective Control board.
• Excessive load on power supply.
• Low input voltage.
PtSt Reference Point Two speed-reference frequency
setpoint values are too close to
each other.
• Two speed reference frequency setpoints are too close to
each other (increase the difference).
UC Undercurrent Output current of the ASD is
below the level defined at F611
and remains there for the time
set at F612.
* Reset ignored if active.
EOI
Display Function Description Possible Causes
176 G7 ASD Operation Manual
User Notification Codes
The User Notification codes appear in the top right corner of the Frequency Command screen while the
associated function is active.
User Notification codes notify the user of active functions that are usually only momentary under normal
conditions and are active for the duration of activation only. User notification events are not error
conditions and only convey active system functions to the user.
Table 11. User Notification codes.
Trips/Faults
A Trip is an ASD response to a Fault (though, Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably). A
Trip is a safety feature that disables the ASD system in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is
malfunctioning.
Listed in Table 12 are the possible Faults that may cause a Trip and the possible causes. When a Trip is
incurred the system displays the Fault screen. The Fault screen identifies the active Fault.
Table 12
EOI Function Description
Atn Autotune active Atn indicates that the Autotune function is active. If the initial Autotune fails for any reason,
an automatic retry is initiated if Other is selected at F413.
Atn2 indicates that an Autotune retry is active for the duration of the automatic retry.
dbOn DC Braking This code conveys the DC Injection function being carried out. The display shows db when
braking and shows dbOn when the motor shaft stationary function is being carried out.
Fault Screen Display Possible Causes
ASD Overload • Acceleration time is too short.
• DC Injection current is too high.
• V/f setting needs to be adjusted.
• Motor running during restart.
• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.
Autotune Error •Autotune readings that are significantly inconsistent with the configuration
information.
• A non-3-phase motor is being used.
• Incorrect settings at F400, F413, or F414.
• Using a motor that has a significantly smaller rating than the ASD.
• ASD output cabling is too small, too long, or is being housed in a cable tray with
other cables that are producing an interfering EMF.
• Motor is running during the Autotune function.
Communication Error • Communication malfunction.
• Improper or loose connection.
• Improper system settings.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 177
Control Power Undervoltage • This fault is caused by an undervoltage condition at the 5, 15, or the 24 VDC
supply.
• 3-phase input voltage low.
CPU Fault • CPU malfunction.
DC Bus Undervoltage • 3-phase input voltage low.
• Defective control board.
• Excessive load on the power supply.
• Undervoltage/Ridethrough settings require adjustment.
DC Fuse Open • Internal DC bus fuse is open.
Note: The event that caused the Trip(s) must be corrected or must decrease to less than the threshold
value required to cause the trip to allow for a Reset to be recognized. In the event of multiple
active trips, the trip displayed will remain until all faults are corrected and all trips are cleared.
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overcurrent • ASD inability to discharge the bus voltage during regeneration.
• No dynamic braking resistor (DBR) installed.
• Deceleration time is too short.
• Improper DBR setup information.
• Defective IGBT7 (or IGBT7 ckt.).
• 3-phase input voltage is above specification.
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload • Deceleration time is too short.
• DBR setting adjustment required.
• Overvoltage Stall setting adjustment required.
Earth Fault • Ground fault at the motor.
• Ground fault at the output of the ASD.
• Current leakage to Earth Ground.
EEPROM Data Fault • Internal EEPROM malfunction.
EEPROM Fault • EEPROM write malfunction.
Emergency Off • Emergency Off command received via EOI or remotely.
Encoder Loss • Encoder signal missing while running during closed-loop operation.
Flash Memory Fault • Flash memory malfunction.
Gate Array Fault • Defective Gate Array or Gate Array malfunction.
Input Phase Loss • 3-phase input to the ASD is low or missing.
Load Drooping • Load requirement is in excess of the capabilities of the motor.
Load End Short Circuit • Improper wiring at the ASD output to the motor.
Low Current • Improper Low Current detection level setting.
Main Board EEPROM Fault • Internal EEPROM malfunction.
Fault Screen Display Possible Causes
178 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Motor Overload • V/f setting needs to be adjusted.
• Motor is locked.
• Continuous operation at low speed.
• Load requirement exceeds ability of the motor.
• Startup frequency setting adjustment required.
No Fault • No active faults.
Option Fault • Optional device malfunction.
• Improper system settings (at ASD or optional device).
• Loose or improper connection.
Output Current Protection Fault • Output current is not within specified limits.
• Loose or improper ASD-to-motor connection.
Output Phase Loss • 3-phase output from the ASD is low or missing.
Note: The event that caused the Trip(s) must be corrected or must decrease to less than the threshold
value required to cause the trip to allow for a Reset to be recognized. In the event of multiple
active trips, the trip displayed will remain until all faults are corrected and all trips are cleared.
Overcurrent During Acceleration • V/f setting needs to be adjusted.
• Restart from a momentary power outage.
• The ASD is starting into a rotating motor.
• ASD/Motor not properly matched.
• Phase-to-phase short (U, V, or W).
•Accel time too short.
•Voltage Boost setting is too high.
• Motor/machine jammed.
• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running.
• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less
during acceleration. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, this fault occurs when
the ASD current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA during acceleration.
Overcurrent During Deceleration • Phase-to-phase short (U, V, or W).
• Deceleration time is too short.
• Motor/machine jammed.
• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running.
• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less
during deceleration. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, it occurs when the
ASD current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA during deceleration.
Overcurrent During Run • Load fluctuations.
• ASD is operating at an elevated temperature.
• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less
during a fixed-speed run or if during a fixed-speed run the ASD overheats. On
ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, it occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320%
of the rated FLA on a fixed-speed run.
Fault Screen Display Possible Causes
G7 ASD Operation Manual 179
Overheat • Cooling fan inoperative.
• Ventilation openings are obstructed.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
Over Speed • Result of a motor speed that is greater than the commanded speed when using an
encoder for speed control.
• Improper encoder connection or setup information.
• Defective encoder.
Overtorque • A torque requirement by the load in excess of the setting of F616 or F617 for a
time longer than the setting of F618.
• The ASD is improperly matched to the application.
• The load is obstructed.
Overvoltage During Acceleration • Motor running during restart.
Note: The event that caused the Trip(s) must be corrected or must decrease to less than the threshold
value required to cause the trip to allow for a Reset to be recognized. In the event of multiple
active trips, the trip displayed will remain until all faults are corrected and all trips are cleared.
Overvoltage During Deceleration • Deceleration time is too short.
• DBR value is too high.
• DBR required (DBR setup required).
• Stall protection is disabled.
• 3-phase input voltage is out of specification.
• Input reactance required.
Overvoltage During Run • Load fluctuations.
• 3-Phase input voltage out of specification.
PG Type/Connection Error • ASD is configured to receive a signal from a shaft-mounted encoder and no signal
is being received while running.
• Disconnection at the Encoder circuit.
• Motor is stopped and is generating torque via torque limit control.
• ASD is not configured properly.
Phantom Fault • In a multiple ASD configuration a faulted ASD signals the remaining ASDs that a
fault has occurred and shuts down the non-faulted ASDs.
Position Deviation Error • Operating in the Position Control mode and the resulting position exceeds the
limits of the F631 setting.
RAM Fault • Internal RAM malfunction.
ROM Fault • Internal ROM malfunction.
Sink/Source Setting Error • Improperly positioned Sink/Source jumper on the control board or on an option
device.
•Sink/Source configuration of an option device is incorrect.
Torque Proving Fault • Lift-First Pulse Count (F743) adjustment required.
Fault Screen Display Possible Causes
180 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Viewing Trip Information
In the event that the condition causing an Alarm does not return to the normal operating level within a
specified time, the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred.
When a trip occurs, the resultant error information may be viewed either from the Trip History screen
(Program ⇒ Monitor Setup ⇒ Trip History), the Trip Monitor From ASD screen (Program ⇒ Monitor
Setup ⇒ Trip Monitor From ASD), or from the Monitor screen.
Trip History
The Trip History screen records the system parameters for up to 101 trips (RTC option required). The
recorded trips are numbered from zero to 100. Once the Trip History record reaches trip number 100, the
oldest recorded trip will be deleted with each new record stored (first-in first-out). The Trip # field may be
selected and scrolled through to view the recorded trip information for a given trip number. The monitored
parameters are listed in Table 13 as At-trip Recorded Parameters (parameter readings at the time that
the trip occurred).
Table 13. Trip History Record Parameters (RTC option required).
Typeform Error • Firmware information (typeform) loaded into the Gate Driver board is
inconsistent with the device in which the firmware is being used.
•The Gate Driver board has been replaced.
•The Gate Driver board is defective.
U Phase Short Circuit • Low impedance at the U lead of the ASD output.
V Phase Short Circuit • Low impedance at the V lead of the ASD output.
W Phase Short Circuit • Low impedance at the W lead of the ASD output.
Note: The event that caused the Trip(s) must be corrected or must decrease to less than the threshold
value required to cause the trip to allow for a Reset to be recognized. In the event of multiple
active trips, the trip displayed will remain until all faults are corrected and all trips are cleared.
Trip records that are assigned zero and one are comprised of the full list of monitored parameters (32).
Trip records 2 – 18 are comprised of parameters 1 – 16. Trip records 19 – 100 are comprised of
parameters 1 – 7.
At-trip Recorded Parameters
1) Trip Number 9) Bus Voltage 17) Torque Reference 25) ASD Load
2) Trip Type 10) Discrete Input Status 18) Torque Current 26) DBR Load
3) Time and Date 11) OUT1/OUT2/FL Status 19) Excitation Current 27) Input Power
4) Frequency at Trip 12) Timer 20) PID Value 28) Output Power
5) Output Current 13) Post Compensation Frequency 21) Motor Overload 29) Peak Current
6) Output Voltage 14) Feedback (inst.) 22) ASD Overload 30) Peak Voltage
7) Direction 15) Feedback (1 sec.) 23) DBR Overload 31) PG Speed
8) Frequency Reference 16) Torque 24) Motor Load 32) PG Position
Fault Screen Display Possible Causes
G7 ASD Operation Manual 181
Trip Monitor From ASD
The Trip Monitor From ASD function records the trip name of up to four trips and catalogs each trip as
Most Recent, Second Most Recent, Third Most Recent, and Fourth Most Recent. Once reset (Clear
Trip), the trip records are erased. If no trips have occurred since the last reset, No Fault is displayed for
each trip record.
Note: An improper ASD setup may cause some trips — reset the ASD to the Factory Default
settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction (Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒
Type Reset ⇒ Restore Factory Defaults).
Trip Record at Monitor Screen
The at-trip condition of the last incurred trip may be viewed at the Monitor screen (see pg. 45). The
Monitor screen at-trip record is erased when the ASD is reset and may be viewed without the use of the
RTC option.
Clearing a Trip
Once the cause of the trip has been corrected, performing a Reset re-enables the ASD for normal
operation.
The record of a trip may also be cleared using either of the following methods:
• Cycling power (trip info may be saved via F602 if desired),
• Pressing the Stop|Reset key twice,
• Remotely via the communications channel,
• Momentarily connecting terminal RES to CC of the Control Terminal Strip, or
• Via Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒ Type Reset ⇒ Clear Trip (clears Trip Monitor From ASD).
182 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate
Information
G7 Part Numbering Convention.
Note: The Type 1 enclosed versions of these drives meet or exceed the specification UL 1995,
the Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment, and complies with the applicable
requirements for installation in a compartment handling conditioned air. The
equipment listed in this manual meets or exceeds the criteria for CE certification and
carries the CE label.
Note: For CE compliance, all Toshiba ASD enclosures with hinged doors shall have a lock
placed on the standard door fastener or be fitted with the Toshiba lock kit (P/N 53730).
Note: All Toshiba ASD enclosures carry an IP20 rating.
Enclosure Dimensions/Weight
Table 14.
Model
Number
VT130G7U
Fig. A
(in/mm) B
(in/mm) C
(in/mm) D
(in/mm) E
(in/mm) F
(in/mm) G
(in/mm) H
(in/mm)
Conduit Plate
Number
(see pg. 187 –
188)
Shipping
Weight
(lbs.)
Bottom Top
2010B
22 8.47/215 7.28/185 7.33/186 8.47/215 7.95/202 6.74/171 0.53/13 0.23/6 49462 N/A 12
2015B
2025B
2035B
2055B
2080B
2110B 14.22/361 12.16/309 11.23/285 14.22/361 13.05/331 11.46/291 0.55/14 0.28/7 49033 N/A 48
G7 ASD Operation Manual 183
2160B
22 14.22/361 12.16/309 11.23/285 14.22/361 13.05/331 11.46/291 0.55/14 0.28/7 49033 N/A
50
2220B 52
2270B 15.72/399 49032 54
2330B
23
24.63/625
17.5/445 12.81/325 22.32/567 23.75/603 14.25/362 0.75/19 0.38/10
50097
N/A
111
2400B 26.47/672 49932 157
2500B 167
2600B 38.63/981 17.5/445 13.78/350 36.35/923 37.75/959 12.63/321 0.75/19 0.63/16 49900 49468 261
2750B 265
210KB
24 50.00/1270 24.15/613 20.00/508 46.15/1172 48.50/1232 12.00/305 0.75/19 0.69/18 54086 54086
466
212KB 475
215KB 496
4015B
22
8.47/215 7.28/185 7.33/186 8.47/215 7.95/202 6.74/171 0.53/13 0.23/6 49462 N/A 13
4025B
4035B
4055B
4080B
4110B 15
4160B
14.22/361 12.16/309 11.23/285 14.22/361 13.05/331 11.46/291 0.55/14 0.28/7 49033 N/A
50
4220B 52
4270B 53
4330B 54
4400B 58
4500B
23
24.63/625 17.5/445 12.81/325 22.32/567 23.75/603 14.25/362 0.75/19 0.38/10 50097 N/A
121
4600B 147
4750B 157
410KB 26.47/672 49932 167
412KB 38.63/981 17.5/445 13.78/350 36.35/923 37.75/959 12.63/321 0.75/19 0.63/16 49900 49468 261
415KB 265
Table 14. (Continued)
Model
Number
VT130G7U
Fig. A
(in/mm) B
(in/mm) C
(in/mm) D
(in/mm) E
(in/mm) F
(in/mm) G
(in/mm) H
(in/mm)
Conduit Plate
Number
(see pg. 187 –
188)
Shipping
Weight
(lbs.)
Bottom Top
184 G7 ASD Operation Manual
420KB
24 50.00/1270 24.15/613 20.00/508 46.15/1172 48.50/1232 12.00/305 0.75/19 0.69/18 54086 54086
466
425KB 475
430KB 496
435KB 73.00/1854 24.00/610 20.00/508 68.00/1727 71.00/1803 16.00/406 0.75/19 0.69/18 51342 51342 665
6015B
22
8.47/215 7.28/185 7.33/186 8.47/215 7.95/202 6.74/171 0.53/13 0.23/6 49462 N/A 13
6025B
6035B
6060B
6080B
6120B
6160B
6220B
14.22/361 12.16/309 11.23/285 14.22/361 13.05/331 11.46/291 0.55/14 0.28/7 49033 N/A
50
6270B 52
6330B 54
6400B 56
6500B 58
6600B
23
24.63/625 17.5/445 12.81/325 22.32/567 23.75/603 14.25/362 0.75/19 0.38/10 50097 N/A 155
6750B 162
610KB
38.63/981 17.5/445 13.78/350 36.35/923 37.75/959 12.63/321 0.75/19 0.63/16 49900 49468 261
612KB
615KB 265
620KB
24 50.00/1270 24.15/613 20.00/508 46.15/1172 48.50/1232 12.00/305 0.75/19 0.69/18 54086 54086
466
625KB 475
630KB 490
Table 14. (Continued)
Model
Number
VT130G7U
Fig. A
(in/mm) B
(in/mm) C
(in/mm) D
(in/mm) E
(in/mm) F
(in/mm) G
(in/mm) H
(in/mm)
Conduit Plate
Number
(see pg. 187 –
188)
Shipping
Weight
(lbs.)
Bottom Top
G7 ASD Operation Manual 185
Figure 22.
Figure 23.
186 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Figure 24.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 187
Conduit Plate Information
The conduit plate information provided below is for the 0.75 to 350 HP G7 ASDs of the 230, 460, and 600
volt product lines. Each bottom or top conduit plate may be cross referenced to the applicable device using
the information in Table 14 on page 182.
Note: Unless otherwise specified, all dimensions are in inches.
Figure 25.
188 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Figure 26.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 189
Conduit Extender Box (option)
The Conduit Extender Box (P/N ASD-Conduit-1) may be used when more room is required at the ASD
conduit connection point. This option makes adding and removing conduit easier and quicker.
Conduit Extender Box Installation
1. Remove the Conduit Plate (P/N 49462 of Figure 27).
2. Install the Conduit Extender Box (P/N 53354 of Figure 28) and secure using the 2 screws from the
conduit plate.
3. Complete the conduit and wiring connections.
4. Install the Conduit Extender Box cover (P/N 53355 of Figure 28).
Figure 27. Remove Conduit Plate.
Figure 28. Conduit Box/Cover.
190 G7 ASD Operation Manual
EOI Remote Mounting
The G7 ASD may be controlled from a remotely-mounted EOI. For safety and application-specific
reasons, some ASD installations will warrant that the operator not be in the vicinity during operation or
that the EOI not be attached to the ASD housing. The EOI may be mounted either with or without the
optional G7 Remote Mounting Kit (P/N ASD-MTG-KIT). The ease of installation is enhanced by the G7
Remote Mounting Kit which allows for easier cable routing and EOI placement.
The EOI can operate up to distances of 15 feet from the ASD via the Common Serial (TTL) Port. For
distances beyond 15 feet, the RS232/RS485 port is recommended.
Remote mounting will also allow for multiple EOI mountings at one location if controlling and
monitoring several ASDs from a central location is required.
The optional dust cover (P/N ASD-BPC) may be used to cover the front panel opening of the ASD
housing after removing the EOI. An EOI extender cable is required for remote mounting. EOI extender
cables are available in lengths of 7, 10, or 15 feet and may be ordered through your sales representative.
Remote EOI Required Hardware
EOI Mounting Hardware
• 6-32 x 5/16” Pan Head Screw — P/N 50595 (4 ea.)
• #6 Split-Lock Washer — P/N 01884 (4 ea.)
• #6 Flat Washer — P/N 01885 (4 ea.)
Bezel Plate Mounting Hardware
• Bezel Plate — P/N 52291
• 10-32 Hex Nut — P/N 01922 (4 ea.)
• #10 Split-Lock Washer — P/N 01923 (4 ea.)
• #10 Flat Washer — P/N 01924 (4 ea.)
• Dust Cover — P/N ASD-BPC (Optional)
Extender Cables
• ASD-CAB7F: Cable, RJ45, 7 ft.
• ASD-CAB10F: Cable, RJ45, 10 ft.
• ASD-CAB15F: Cable, RJ45, 15 ft.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 191
EOI Installation Precautions
Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight using the four mounting holes
of the EOI. The ambient temperature rating for the EOI is 14 to 104° F (-10 to 40° C).
• Select a mounting location that is easily accessible by the user.
• Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, metal particles, or high levels of
electrical noise (EMI) are present.
• Do not install the EOI where it may be exposed to flammable chemicals or gases, water, solvents, or
other fluids.
• Turn the power on only after securing the front cover to the ASD.
EOI Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT
Note: See Figure 29 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1 through 5.
1. At the EOI mounting location, identify and mark the location of the 3.80” by 3.29” hole and the
7/32” screw holes.
2. Cut the 3.80” by 3.29” rectangular hole.
3. Drill the four 7/32” screw holes.
4. Attach and secure the EOI to the front side of the mounting location using the four 6-32 x 5/16” pan
head screws, the #6 split lock washers, and the #6 flat washers.
5. Connect the RJ-45 extension cable(s).
EOI Dimensions (mounting)
Figure 29. EOI Mounting Dimensions.
192 G7 ASD Operation Manual
EOI Remote Mounting using the ASD-MTG-KIT
Note: See Figures 30 and 31 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1
through 6.
1. At the EOI mounting location, identify and mark the locations of the 5.00” by 4.60” hole and the
four 11/32” screw holes.
2. Cut the 5.00” by 4.60” rectangular hole.
3. Drill the four 11/32” holes.
4. Attach and secure the Bezel plate to the front side of the mounting location using the four 10-32
hex nuts, #10 split lock washers, and the #10 flat washers.
5. Attach and secure the EOI to the front side of the Bezel plate using the four 6-32 x 5/16” pan head
screws, #6 split lock washers, and the #6 flat washers.
6. Connect the RJ-45 extension cable(s).
EOI ASD-MTG-KIT Dimensions (mounting)
Figure 30. EOI Bezel Plate Mounting Dimensions.
Figure 31. Screw Length Precaution.
Front View Side View Back View
4.60
5.38
4.25
5.00
Bezel Plate Bezel Plate
Mounting Hole
11/32" Screw Hole (4)
CAUTION: Failure to use the correct hardware may result in damage to the outer surface of the EOI panel
a
nd/or improper seating of the panel to the bezel plate. Use caution when mounting the EOI assembly to ensur
e
t
hat the internal thread clearance is maintained.
Correct Incorrect
G7 ASD Operation Manual 193
Current/Voltage Specifications
Table 15. 230 Volt NEMA Type-1/IP-20 Chassis standard ratings table.
Model
VT130G7U Rated
KVA Motor
HP/Kw
Input Voltage
3-Ph 50/60
± 2 Hz
Output Voltage
3-Ph Variable
Frequency
Output Current
100/110% Cont.
Overload
Current
150% for
60 Secs.
Overload
Current
150% for
120 Secs.
2010B 1.0 0.75/0.56
200 – 240 VAC
(±10%)
Input Voltage Level
(Max.)
3.5/3.9 A 5.3 A
2015B 1.5 1.0/0.75 5.0/5.5 A 7.5 A
2025B 2.5 2.0/1.5 7.0/7.7 A 10.5 A
2035B 3.5 3.0/2.2 10.0/11.0 A 15.0 A
2055B 5.5 5.0/3.7 16.0/17.6 A 24.0 A
2080B 8.0 7.5/5.6 23.0/25.3 A 34.5 A
2110B 11 10/7.5 30.0/33.0 A 45.0 A
2160B 16 15/11.2 45.0/49.5 A 67.5 A
2220B 22 20/14.9 60.0/66.0 A 90.0 A
2270B 27 25/18.5 71.0/78.1 A 106.5 A
2330B 33 30/22.0 90.0/99.0 A 135.0 A
* 2400B 40 40/30 110/121.0 A 126.5 A
* 2500B 50 50/37 138/151.8 A 158.7 A
* 2600B 60 60/45 172/189.2 A 197.8 A
* 2750B 75 75/55 206/226.6 A 236.9 A
* 210KB 100 100/75 275/302.5 A 316.3 A
* 212KB 125 125/90 343/377.3 A 394.5 A
* 215KB 150 150/110 415/456.5 A 477.3 A
Note: *12-Pulse option available.
Table 16. 460 Volt NEMA Type-1/IP-20 Chassis standard ratings table.
Model
VT130G7U Rated
KVA Motor
HP/Kw
Input Voltage
3-Ph 50/60
± 2 Hz
Output Voltage
3-Ph Variable
Frequency
Output
Current 100/
110% Cont.
Overload
Current
130% for
120 Secs.
Overload
Current
150% for
60 Secs.
Overload
Current
150% for
120 Secs.
4015B 1.5 1.0/0.75
380 – 480 VAC
(±10%)
Input Voltage
Level (Max.)
2.7/3.0 A
N/A N/A
4.1 A
4025B 2.5 2.0/1.5 3.5/3.9 A 5.3 A
4035B 3.5 3.0/2.2 5.0/5.5 A 7.5 A
4055B 5.5 5.0/3.7 8.0/8.8 A 12.0 A
4080B 8.0 7.5/5.6 11.5/12.7 A 17.3 A
4110B 11.0 10.0/7.5 15.0/16.5 A 22.5 A
4160B 16.0 15.0/11.2 23.0/25.3 A 34.5 A
4220B 22.0 20.0/14.9 30.0/33.0 A 45.0 A
194 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Table 17. 600 Volt NEMA Type-1/IP-20 Chassis standard ratings table.
4270B 27.0 25.0/18.5
380 – 480 VAC
(±10%)
Input Voltage Level
(Max.)
38.0/41.8 A 57.0 A
4330B 33.0 30.0/22.0 45.0/49.5 A 67.5 A
4400B 40.0 40.0/30.0 57.0/62.7 A 85.5 A
4500B 50.0 50.0/37.0 71.0/78.1 A 106.5 A
* 4600B 60.0 60.0/45.0 83.0/91.3 A 124.5 A
* 4750B 75.0 75.0/55.0 104.0/114.4 A 156.0 A
* 410KB 100 100/75.0 138.0/151.8 A 207.0 A
* 412KB 125 125/90.0 172.0/189.2 A 258.0 A
N/A
* 415KB 150 150/110 206.0/226.6 A 309.0 A
* 420KB 200 200/150 275.0/302.5 A 412.5 A
* 425KB 250 250/185 343.0/377.3 A 514.5 A
* 430KB 300 300/220 415.0/456.5 A 622.5 A
* 435KB 350 350/243 447.0/491.7 A 586.8 A 670.5 A
Note: *12-Pulse option available.
Model
VT130G7U Rated
KVA Motor
HP/Kw
Input Voltage
3-Ph 50/60
±2 Hz
Output Voltage
3-Ph Variable
Frequency
Output
Current 100/
110% Cont.
Overload
Current 150%
for 60 Secs.
Overload
Current 150%
for 120 Secs.
6015B 1.5 1.0/0.75
495 – 600 VAC
(+5/-10%)
Input Voltage Level
(Max.)
2.1/2.3 A
N/A
3.2 A
6025B 2.5 2.0/1.5 3.0/3.3 A 4.5 A
6035B 3.5 3.0/2.2 4.0/4.4 A 6.0 A
6060B 6.0 5.0/3.7 6.1/6.7 A 9.2 A
6080B 8.0 7.5/5.0 9.0/9.9 A 13.5 A
6110B 11.0 10.0/7.5 12.0/13.2 A 18.0 A
6160B 16.0 15.0/11.2 17.0/18.7 A 25.5 A
6220B 22.0 20.0/14.9
495 – 600 VAC
(±10%)
22.0/24.2 A 33.0 A
6270B 27.0 25.0/18.5 27.0/29.7 A 40.5 A
6330B 33.0 30.0/22.0 32.0/35.2 A 48.0 A
6400B 40.0 40.0/30.0 41.0/45.1 A 61.5 A
6500B 50.0 50.0/37.0 52.0/57.2 A 78.0 A
6600B 60.0 60.0/45.0 62.0/68.2 A 93.0 A
6750B 75.0 75.0/55.0 77.0/84.7 A 115.5 A
* 610KB 100 100/75.0 99.0/108.9 A 148.5 A
* 612KB 125 125/90.0 125.0/137.5 A 187.5 A
N/A
* 615KB 150 150/110 150.0/165.0 A 225.0 A
* 620KB 200 200/150 200.0/220.0 A 300.0 A
* 625KB 250 250/185 250.0/275.0 A 375.0 A
* 630KB 300 300/224 289.0/317.9 A 433.5 A
Note: *12-Pulse option available.
Table 16. (Continued) 460 Volt NEMA Type-1/IP-20 Chassis standard ratings table.
Model
VT130G7U Rated
KVA Motor
HP/Kw
Input Voltage
3-Ph 50/60
± 2 Hz
Output Voltage
3-Ph Variable
Frequency
Output
Current 100/
110% Cont.
Overload
Current
130% for
120 Secs.
Overload
Current
150% for
60 Secs.
Overload
Current
150% for
120 Secs.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 195
Cable/Terminal Specifications
Note: Input and Output power wires require shielding for CE compliance.
Note: (*) Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables.
Installation should conform to the 2002 National Electrical Code Article 110 (NEC) (Requirements for
Electrical Installations), all regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, and any
other applicable national, regional, or industry codes and standards.
Note: The following ratings are guidelines and shall not be the sole determining factor of the
lug or wire size used with the ASD. Application-specific applicables, wire insulation type,
conductor material, and local and regional regulations are but a few of the
considerations when selecting the actual lug and wire type to be used with the ASD.
Note: Cable/Terminal specifications are based on the rated current of the ASD and Do Not
include the 10% Service Factor.
For further installation information see the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 17.
Table 18. 230-volt G7 ASD Cable/Terminal Specifications.
Model
VT130G7U
MCP
Rating
(Amps)
Typical Wire/Cable Size (AWG or kcmil) Lug Size Range
Input/Output Power AM, FM, and II
Terminals Control Terminals Wire-Size/Lug-Capacity for
Input/Output Power
Recommended Maximum
2010B 15 14 10
20
(3-core shield)
18
(2-core shield)
24 to 8
2015B 15 14 10
2025B 15 14 10
2035B 20 14 10
2055B 30 12 10
2080B 50 10 10
2110B 50 8 4
18 to 42160B 75 6 4
2220B 100 4 4
2270B 125 3 2 16 to 1
2330B 150 2 2 10 to 1/0
2400B 175 1/0 2/0
2500B 200 2/0 2/0 12 to 4/0
2600B 250 *1/0 *4/0 *(6 to 250)
2750B 300 *2/0 *4/0
210KB 400 *4/0 *500
*(1/0 to 500)212KB 500 *300 *500
215KB 600 *400 *500
196 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Note: Input and Output power wires require shielding for CE compliance.
Note: (*) Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables.
Note: (**) Indicates that a 1.5” conduit orifice is required if using the recommended cable
size.
Table 19. 460-volt G7 ASD Cable/Terminal Specifications.
Model
VT130G7U
MCP
Rating
(Amps)
Typical Wire/Cable Size (AWG or kcmil) Lug Size Range
Input/Output Power AM, FM, and II
Terminals Control Terminals Wire-Size/Lug-Capacity for
Input/Output Power
Recommended Maximum
4015B 15 14 10
20
(3-core shield)
18
(2-core shield)
24 to 8
4025B 15 14 10
4035B 15 14 10
4055B 15 14 10
4080B 20 14 10
4110B 30 12 10
4160B 30 10 4
18 to 4
4220B 50 8 4
4270B 75 8 4
4330B 75 6 4
4400B 100 4 4
4500B 100 3 2 16 to 1
4600B 125 2 2 10 to 1/0
4750B 175 1**2
410KB 200 2/0 2/0 12 to 4/0
412KB 250 *1/0 *4/0 *(6 to 250)
415KB 300 *2/0 *4/0
420KB 400 *4/0 *500
*(1/0 to 500)
425KB 500 *300 *500
430KB 600 *400 *500
435KB 700 *500 *500
G7 ASD Operation Manual 197
Note: Input and Output power wire requires shielding for CE compliance.
Note: (*) Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables.
Note: (**) Indicates that a 1.5” conduit orifice is required if using the recommended cable
size.
Table 20. 600-volt G7 ASD Cable/Terminal Specifications.
Model
VT130G7U
MCP
Rating
(Amps)
Typical Wire/Cable Size (AWG or kcmil) Lug Size Range
Input/Output Power AM, FM, and II
Terminals Control Terminals Wire-Size/Lug-Capacity for
Input/Output Power
Recommended Maximum
6015B 15 14 10
20
(3-core shield)
18
(2-core shield)
24 to 8
6025B 15 14 10
6035B 15 14 10
6060B 15 14 10
6080B 15 14 10
6120B 30 14 10
6160B 30 10 10
6220B 50 10 4
18 to 4
6270B 50 8 4
6330B 50 8 4
6400B 75 6 4
6500B 100 6 4
6600B 100 4 2 16 to 1
6750B 125 3 2
610KB 150 1*4/0
*(6 to 250)612KB 200 2/0 *4/0
615KB 250 3/0 *4/0
620KB 300 *2/0 *500
*(1/0 to 500)625KB 400 *3/0 *500
630KB 500 *4/0 *500
198 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable
Specifications
When using a Dynamic Braking Resistor (DBR), use thermal protection and an input contactor that will
open the input 3-phase power circuit to the ASD in the event that a DBR over-temperature condition
occurs. In the event of a power source over-voltage condition or an ASD failure the input contactor will
prevent hazardous DBR temperatures.
Because the heat generated by the DBR will affect the cooling capacity of the heatsink, the resistor pack
should be mounted above or to the side of the ASD — Never below the ASD. Maintain a minimum of six
inches between the resistor pack and the ASD unit.
Heavy duty DBRs should be wired using the same gauge wire as the motor leads. Light duty DBRs may
use one wire size smaller (AWG) than the motor leads.
The total wire length from the ASD to the DBR should not exceed ten feet.
The wiring from the ASD to the DBR should be twisted approximately two twists per foot throughout the
length of the wire.
If EMI/RFI noise is of concern, the DBR wiring should be three-core screened cable. The screen should
connect to the ASD enclosure and the resistor enclosure.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 199
Link Reactor Information
Selection of a link reactor (DCL) is often application specific. This document will provide guidelines for
selecting link reactors for the G7 series of drives.
The 600 Volt series drives above 15 HP allow for the reactor to be mounted internal to the drive. All other
G7 drives require that the DCL be mounted externally.
When selecting and mounting an external DCL, the air flow around the reactor, the thermal capability of
the reactor, the allowable voltage loss, and the amount of harmonic reduction required will be
considerations.
Table 21. DCL Selection Table.
Model Number
VT130G7U DCL Part
Number DCL Inductance
(mH) DCL
(Amps)
2080B 36350 0.40 30.0
2110B 36351 0.30 38.0
2160B 36376 0.20 57.0
2220B 36353 0.20 76.0
2270B 36355 0.10 114
4110B 36358 1.30 20.0
4160B 36359 0.90 29.0
4220B 36360 0.70 39.0
4270B 36361 0.50 50.0
4330B 36363 0.40 75.0
4400B 36364 0.30 88.0
4500B 36365 0.20 114.0
4600B 36365 0.20 114.0
4750B 36366 0.20 141.0
410KB 42769 0.14 205.0
6060B 36356 2.50 11.0
6120B 36359 0.90 29.0
6160B 36359 0.90 29.0
6220B 36360 0.70 39.0
6270B 36362 0.50 55.0
6330B 36361 0.50 50.0
6400B 36363 0.40 75.0
6500B 36363 0.40 75.0
6600B 36364 0.30 88.0
6750B 36365 0.20 114.0
610KB 36366 0.20 141.0
612KB 36367 0.15 175.0
615KB 41443 0.19 260.0
620KB 41443 0.19 260.0
625KB 45259 0.10 360.0
200 G7 ASD Operation Manual
G7 Optional Devices
The ASD may be equipped with several options which are used to expand the functionality of the ASD.
Table 22 lists the available options and their functions.
Table 22. G7 Optional devices and functions.
Item Device Function
ASD7-SIM2 Emulates the input control signals of the G7 ASD via switches and pots.
ASD-BPC Provides dust protection for the G7 ASD when the EOI is removed or mounted remotely.
ASD-CAB-PC Female 9-pin d-type to RJ-45 (PC to ASD cable).
ASD-EOI-N4 A replacement NEMA-4 EOI (without Rotary Encoder)
ASD-ISO-1 Provides isolation of the Control Board output circuit from the AM/FM output and
from the II input.
ASD-MTG-KIT EOI Remote Mounting Kit. See the section titled EOI Remote Mounting on pg. 190 for
further information on this option.
ASD-RTC The Real Time Clock provides the user with a time stamp of the Start, Run, and Fault
events.
ASD-SS
This option board is used to provide a hardware-based speed search function.
Note: The ASD-SS is a factory-authorized service center-installed option for
all 1 – 5 HP ASDs, 10 – 25 HP 230 volt ASDs, and 15 – 40 HP 460
volt ASDs (see F314).
Note: On ASDs that are rated at 50 HP and above, the ASD-SS hardware
option cannot be used if using a shaft-mounted encoder.
ASD-TB1-AC1 Provides 120 VAC discrete terminal activation and additional I/O terminals.
Conduit
Extender Box
(option)
Provides more working space for conduit installation than the standard conduit plate.
HS35 Encoder
Provides rotational speed and/or directional information. The Encoder is mounted on the
motor shaft or the shaft-driven equipment.
Note: On ASDs that are rated at 50 HP and above, the ASD-SS (Speed
Search) hardware option board cannot be used if using a shaft-
mounted encoder.
ASD – Multicom Option Boards
Note: Multicom boards are identified as ASD-Multicom-A, -B, -F, etc.
-A Incorporates the Modbus, Profibus, or Device Net communications protocol for system
control and is able to receive and process Vector Control feedback.
-B Provides a line driver and open collector interface for system control.
-F The Tosline-F10 interface provides high-speed communication to Toshiba control
equipment via twisted pair wiring.
-J Able to receive and process vector control feedback via line driver or open collector
interface.
-S The Tosline-S20 interface provides high-speed communication to Toshiba control
equipment via fiber optics.
-X Provides extended terminal I/O functions for monitoring, feedback, and control.
Note: See the user manual of the applicable option for further information on each item.
G7 ASD Operation Manual 201
G7 ASD Spare Parts Listing
Table 23. 230 Volt 0.75 – 150 HP Spare Parts Listing.
MODEL
NUMBER CONTROL
FUSE DC BUS
FUSE CONTACTOR FAN RESISTOR TRANSISTORS RECT. MAIN CAPS MOV
VT130G7U FU1 (A) FU2 MS1/MS2 FAN1 FAN2/3 R21A/R22 IGM IGBT7 RECT. CAP MOV
1/2,3
2010B
N/A
00646 49648A 50037 N/A 49648A
56620A
2015B 56620B
2025B 56620C
2035B 56620D
2055B 00647 56620E
2080B 50248 49648G 51088 49648G 56621A
2110B 00638
45678 46023
N/A
00388
55624 *45056 45593
(2)
49054
2160B 00640 55625 *45009
30536
(2)
2220B 00641 00388
(2)
47963 49036 34835
(2)
2270B 45813
41803
47342
2330B 00441
(2) 00642
42338
44362
47964
(3) 52095 48019
(2)
2400B
37160
(2)
00626
35489
47969
(3)
52806
46466 34835
(6) 49047
2500B 00628 42767
32038
47970
(3) 45241
(6) 48020
(6)
30965/
03672
(2)
2600B 44272
(2) 42768 48718 30634
(2) 50000
(3)
33207
45242
(6)
48019
(8) 55318
(3)
2750B 43588
(2) 33785 48020
(8)
210KB
39660
(2) 37578
(2)
51973/37698
54140 00226 35489
(2)/
53747
50000
(6) 47235 30965/
03672
(2)
212KB
51758/37698
45241
(12) 37568
(6)
215KB 55383 00226/
00224 45242
(6) 37568
(8)
*Contained within the IGM module.
The following item is common to the above-listed typeforms.
EOI — 49012
Parenthesized are the total quantities per model for the part immediately above the parenthesized quantity only. Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory
of 2 minimum for the parts listed. If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity
(2 minimum).
202 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Table 24. 230 Volt 0.75 – 150 HP PCB Spare Parts Listing.
MODEL
NUMBER
PCB Part Numbers
34499 48605 48776 49648 51389 51507 52266 53288 53300 53390 56000 56220 56221 56222 56223
VT130G7U A, B, C, etc. is the PCB Typeform.
2010B A A A
2015B A A B
2025B A A C
2035B A A D
2055B A A E
2080B G A A
2110B A A A
2160B B A A
2220B C A B
2270B D A B
2330B A1 A
(3) A A A
2400B A1 A52266 A
(3) A N
2500B A1 A52266 A
(3) A P
2600B DA1 A52266 A
(3) A
(3) F P
2750B DA1 A52266 A
(3) A
(3) F Q
210KB EA1 A52266 A
(6) B
(3) F A
212KB EA1 A52266 A
(6) B
(3) F A
215KB EA1 A52266 A
(6) B
(3) F A
The following items are common to the above-listed typeforms.
Control Terminal Strip PCB — 48570A.
4-20 mA PCB — 50611A.
Parenthesized are the total quantities per model for the part immediately above the parenthesized quantity only. Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory
of 2 minimum for the parts listed. If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity
(2 minimum).
G7 ASD Operation Manual 203
Table 25. 460 Volt 1.0 – 350 HP Spare Parts Listing.
MODEL
NUMBER INPUT
FUSE CONTROL
FUSE DC BUS FUSE CONTACTOR FAN RESISTOR XSISTORS RECT. MAIN
CAPS MOV
VT130G7U R, S, and T FU1 (A) FU2 (A) FU3
(A) (B) (C) MS1 MS2 FAN1 FAN
2/3 R21
(A) / (B) IGM IGBT7 RECT. CAP MOV1 MOV
(2) (3)
4015B
N/A
N/A
48762
N/A
49648C
N/A
50037
N/A
56220F
4025B 56220G
4035B 56220H
4055B 00621 56220K
4080B 50830 49648D
56221B
4110B 51088 56221C
4160B 02424
45678 46023
N/A
00388
55626 *45237 30560
(2)
49047 N/A
4220B
00629 56344
49037
45238
34835
(2)
4270B
00388
(2)
48019
(2)
4330B
03250 54969 45239
45182
(2)
4400B 50855
(2)
4500B
37160
(2)
00625 42338
44362 35489
56193
(3) 46465 30536
(6)
4600B
00626
42337
47969
(3)
52806
46466
30560
(6)
4750B 42338 34835
(6)
410KB 00628 42767
32028
47970
(3) 45241
(6) 48020
(6) 30965 03672
(2)
412KB 46112
(3) 44272
(2)
42768 48718
30624
(2) 50000
(3)
32207
45242
(6)
48019
(8) 55318
(3) N/A
415KB 43855
(3) 43855
(2) 30634
(2) 33785
U8020
(8)
420KB 39659
(3)
39660
(2)
37578
(2)
51973
37698
54140 00226 35489
(2)
/53747
50000
(6) 47235
30965 03672
(2)
425KB 37576
(3)
51958
45241
(12) 37568
(6)
430KB 37578
(3)
55383 00226/
00224 45242
(12) 37568
(8) 52754 3670
(2)
435KB N/A 42141
(4) 37693 00226 37580
(18) 37565
(18) 37565 43919
(3)
*Contained within the IGM module.
The following item is common to the above-listed typeforms.
EOI — 49012
Parenthesized are the total quantities per model for the part immediately above the parenthesized quantity only. Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2
minimum for the parts listed. If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity
(2 minimum).
204 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Table 26. 460 Volt 1.0 – 350 HP PCB Spare Parts Listing.
MODEL
NUMBER
PCB Part Numbers
34499 38383 44292 44293 48605 48776 49648 50001 51389 51507 52266
(Assy) 53288 53300 53390 56000 56220 56221 56222 56223
VT130G7U A, B, C, etc. is the PCB Typeform.
4015B C A F
4025B C A G
4035B C A H
4055B C A K
4080B D A B
4110B D A C
4160B E A C
4220B F A D
4270B G A D
4330B H A D
4400B J A D
4500B B A 52266 A G
4600B B B 52266 A
(3) A C
4750B B B 52266 A
(3) A C
410KB B B 52266 A
(3) A E
412KB D B B 52266 A
(3) A
(3) F E
415KB D B B 52266 A
(3) A
(3) F F
420KB E B B 52266 A
(6) B
(3) F G
425KB E B B 52266 A
(6) B
(3) F G
430KB E B B 52266 A
(6) B
(3) F G
435KB EA
(6) A
(3) A
(3) B H 52266 F G
The following items are common to the above-listed typeforms.
Control Terminal Strip PCB — 48570A.
4-20 mA PCB — 50611A.
Parenthesized are the total quantities per model for the part immediately above the parenthesized quantity only. Toshiba recommends a
spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed. If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts
inventory is one third of the total unit quantity (2 minimum).
G7 ASD Operation Manual 205
Table 27. 600 Volt 1.0 – 300 HP Spare Parts Listing.
MODEL
NUMBER INPUT
FUSE CONTROL
FUSE
DC
BUS
FUSE CONTACTOR FAN RESISTOR RECT. MOV XSISTORS MAIN
CAPS
VT130G7U R, S, and T FU1 (A) FU2 MS1 MS2 FAN1 FAN2/3 R21
(A) (B)/R22 RECT. MOV1 MOV
(2) (3) IGBT7(A) IGM CAP
6015B
N/A
N/A
49110
49648F
N/A
50037
N/A
49648F
56220L
6025B 56220M
6035B 56220N
6060B 56220P
6080B
51088
56221D
6120B
49648G 49648G
56221E
6160B 49660 51264 45237 32144
(3)
N/A
56221F 50333
(4)
6220B
56353 32143
46023
N/A
00388
(2)
45237
49055
55626 47973
(2)
6270B
49037
56344 48023
(2)
6330B 56352
32143
(2)
45238
54969
49114
(2)
6400B 56351 49115
(2)
6500B 56350 45239 49116
(2)
6600B
37164
(2)
45479 42337 44362 35489 46465
56193
(3) 47974
(6)
6750B 47969
(3) 48023
(6)
610KB 100620
(3) 45520
42768 56191 32028 30634
(2) 45242
(6)
32911
55524
(2)
55468
49999
(3)
48019
(9)
612KB
615KB 46112
(3) 45480 48020
(9)
620KB 39714
(3)
50518
(2)
51973
37698 54140
00226 35489
(2)
/53747
45241
(6)
32910
(2) 49999
(6)
45182
(9)
625KB 39659
(3) 51958 45242
(6)
50855
(9)
630KB 00226/
00224 37568
(9)
*Contained within the IGM module.
The following item is common to the above-listed typeforms.
EOI — 49012
Parenthesized are the total quantities per model for the part immediately above the parenthesized quantity only. Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory
of 2 minimum for the parts listed. If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity
(2 minimum).
206 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Table 28. 600 Volt 1.0 – 300 HP PCB Spare Parts Listing.
MODEL
NUMBER
PCB Part Numbers
34499 42180 48776 51507 51580 52266 53288 53300 53390 55455 56000 56220 56221 56222
VT130G7U A, B, C, etc. is the PCB Typeform.
6015B A L
6025B A M
6035B A N
6060B A P
6080B A D
6120B A E
6160B A F
6220B Q C A A J
6270B R C A A A J
6330B U C A A A J
6400B V C A A A J
6500B W C A A A J
6600B C B 52266 A
(3) A K
6750B C B 52266 A
(3) A K
610KB D A B B 52266 A
(3) A
(3) A K
612KB D A B B 52266 A
(3) A
(3) F K
615KB D A B B 52266 A
(3) A
(3) F K
620KB E A B B 52266 A
(6) B
(3) F L
625KB E A B B 52266 A
(6) B
(3) F L
630KB E A B B 52266 A
(6) B
(3) F L
The following items are common to the above-listed typeforms.
Control Terminal Strip PCB — 48570A.
4-20 mA PCB — 50611A.
Parenthesized are the total quantities per model for the part immediately above the parenthesized quantity only. Toshiba recommends a spare parts
inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed. If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total
unit quantity (2 minimum).
Index
G7 ASD Operation Manual 207
Numerics
0 Hz Command Function, 106
0 Hz Dead Band Signal, 105
12-pulse operation, 20
A
Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time, 158
Abnormal Speed Settings, 52
Acc/Dec Base Frequency Adjustment, 161
Acc/Dec Group, 142
Acc/Dec Switching Frequency #1, 142
Accel #1 Time, 63
Accel #2 Time, 140
Accel #3 Time, 143
Accel #4 Time, 144
Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings, 57
Accel/Decel #1 Settings, 47
Accel/Decel Lower Limit Time, 143
Accel/Decel Pattern #1, 141
Accel/Decel Pattern #2, 142
Accel/Decel Pattern #3, 143
Accel/Decel Pattern #4, 144
Accel/Decel Settings, 57
Accel/Decel Special, 57
Accel/Decel Special Display Resolution, 165
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #2, 143
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #3, 144
Acceleration, 63
Acceleration Time Adjustment, 161
Adjust Accel/Decel Automatically, 41
Alarm Popups, 47
Alarms, 174
AM, 22, 24, 56
AM Terminal Adjustment, 163
AM Terminal Assignment, 163
AM, FM, FP, and Analog 1&2 settings, 61
Analog, 163
Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment, 163
Analog 1 Terminal Setting, 163
Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment, 164
Analog 2 Terminal Setting, 163
Analog Filter, 50
Analog Input Filter, 94
Analog Input Functions, 49
Analog1, 56
Analog2, 56
ASD – Multicom Option Boards, 200
ASD Capacity, 16
ASD Control, 26
ASD Number, 168
ASD Overload, 176
ASD7-SIM2, 200
ASD-BPC, 200
ASD-CAB-PC, 200
ASD-CONDUIT-1, 200
ASD-EOI-N4, 200
ASD-FUSEKIT-12P, 20
ASD-ISO-1, 200
ASD-MTG-KIT, 200
ASD-NANOCOM, 26
ASD-side Switching Wait Time, 120
ASD-SS, 200
ASD-TB1-AC1, 200
At-Frequency Powerline Switching, 120
Atn, 176
At-trip Recorded Parameters, 180
Automatic Accel/Decel #1, 59
Autotune Error, 176
Autotuning, 13
B
Backlash Setup, 57
Base Frequency Volts, 52
Bezel Mounting Dimensions, 192
Bezel Mounting Hardware, 190
BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 101
BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency), 102
BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 102
BIN Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency), 102
BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 102
BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 103
Brake Fault Internal Timer, 159
Brake Fault Timer, 52
Break/Make Start, 111
C
Cable/Terminal Specifications, 195
Carrier Frequency, 57, 111
CC, 22, 24
CE compliance, 182
CE Compliance Requirements, 10
Changed from Default, 47
Changed From Default screen, 39
Circuit breaker configuration, 18
Clearing a Trip, 181
208 G7 ASD Operation Manual
CM1, 174
CM2, 174
CN3 Pinout, 27
CN7 Pinout, 28
CNU1/1A and CNU2/2A Pinout, 27
CNU2/2A Pinout, 27
Command Control Selections, 34
Command Mode Selection, 59
Command Source, 42
Commercial Power Switching Frequency Hold Time,
121
Commercial Power Wait Time, 120
Common Serial (TTL), 26
Communication Baud Rate (logic), 167
Communication Error, 55, 172, 176
Communication Internal, 169
Communication Reference Adjust, 55
Communication Setting Parameters, 54
Communication Settings, 54
Communications Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 170
Communications Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 171
Communications Speed Setpoint #1 (frequency), 171
Communications Speed Setpoint #2 (frequency), 171
Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss, 139
concerns about this publication, 4
Conduit Extender Box, 189
Conduit Extender Box Installation, 189
Conduit Plate Information, 182, 187
Configuration and Menu Options, 43
Connecting the ASD, 19
Connection Diagram, 30
Constant Vector Control, 138
Continued Stall Until Trip During Power Operation, 135
continuous splash screen, 27
Contrast (adjustment), 47
Control, 26
Control Board, 26
Control Power Undervoltage, 177
Control Terminal Strip, 22
CPU Fault, 177
Crane/Hoist Load, 57
Cumulative Run Timer, 52
Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting, 158
Current Control Integral Gain, 124
Current Control Proportional Gain, 123
Current Differential Gain, 135
Current Vector Control, 138
Current/Voltage Specifications, 193
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Frequency, 89
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Voltage, 89
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #2 Frequency, 89
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #2 Voltage, 89
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #3 Frequency, 90
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #3 Voltage, 90
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #4 Frequency, 90
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #4 Voltage, 90
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #5 Frequency, 90
Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #5 Voltage, 90
D
Date and time setting, 47
dbOn, 176
DC Braking, 51
DC Bus Undervoltage, 177
DC Fuse Open, 177
DC Injection Braking Current, 105
DC Injection Braking Start Frequency, 105
DC Injection Braking Time, 106
DCL Selection Table, 199
Dead Time Compensation, 58
Dead Time Compensation (Enable), 139
Dead-time Compensation Bias, 139
Decel #1 Time, 63
Decel #2 Time, 140
Decel #3 Time, 143
Decel #4 Time, 144
Deceleration Time Adjustment, 161
Default Setting Changes, 39
Default Term. Setting, 22
Derate Threshold frequency, 111
Direct Access, 47
Direct Access Parameter Information, 59
Direct Access Parameters/Numbers, 59
Direction (of motor rotation), 62
Discrete Input, 22
Discrete Input Terminal Assignment, 76
Discrete Output, 22
Display Units, 48
Display Units for Voltage and Current, 164
Disposal, 4
Down Key, 36
Drive Characteristics, 16
Driving Torque Limit #1, 133
Driving Torque Limit #2, 133
Driving Torque Limit #3, 134
Driving Torque Limit #4, 134
Drooping, 115
Drooping Control, 54
Drooping Gain, 115
Drooping Insensitive Torque Range, 116
Drooping Output Filter, 116
Drooping Reference, 117
Dynamic Braking, 51, 112
Dynamic Braking Enable, 112
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overcurrent, 177
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload, 177
G7 ASD Operation Manual 209
E
Earth Fault, 177
Earth Fault Alarm Level, 160
Earth Fault Alarm Time, 160
Earth Fault Trip Level, 160
Earth Fault Trip Time, 160
EEPROM Data Fault, 177
EEPROM Fault, 177
Electronic Gear Setting, 123
Electronic Operator Interface, 36
Electronic Thermal Protection #1, 154
Electronic Thermal Protection #2, 86
Electronic Thermal Protection #3, 87
Electronic Thermal Protection #4, 88
Emergency Off, 177
Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time, 155
Emergency Off Mode Settings, 154
Emergency Off Setting, 51
EMG, 174
Enclosure Dimensions/Weight, 182
Encoder, 200
Encoder Action, 47
Encoder Loss, 177
End Frequency, 105
Enter Key, 36
EOI Bezel Mounting Dimensions, 192
EOI Bezel Plate Dimensions (mounting), 192
EOI Features, 36
EOI Installation Precautions, 191
EOI Operation, 37
EOI Remote Mounting, 190
EOI Remote Mounting using the ASD-MTG-KIT, 192
EOI Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT, 191
EOI Setup Options, 47
Equipment Inspection, 3
Escape Key, 36
Excitation Starting Rate, 138
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient, 137
Extended Terminal Function, 70
Extender Cables, 190
F
F, 22, 23
F Input Terminal Assignment, 71
F Input Terminal Delay, 80
Fan Control, 52, 157
Fault, 173
Fault Status, 46
Faults, 173
Feedback in Panel Mode, 166
Feedback Parameters, 53, 54
Feedback Settings, 53
Feedback Settings Differential (D) Gain, 122
Feedback Source, 121
Feedback Source Delay Filter, 121
Ferraz Shawmut Semiconductor fuse, 20
FH, 63
Filter Selection Table, 11
FL Off Delay, 84
FL On Delay, 83
FL Output Terminal Assignment, 79
FLA, 22, 24
FLA, B, and C switching relationship, 24
Flash Memory Fault, 177
FLB, 22, 24
FLC, 22, 24
FM, 22, 24, 56
FM Terminal Adjustment, 60
FM Terminal Assignment, 60
Forward Speed Limit Input, 131
Forward Speed Limit Level, 131
FP, 22, 24
FP Terminal Adjustment, 164
FP Terminal Setting, 164
FP Terminal Settings, 49
Frequency Control, 57
Frequency Control Selections, 35
Frequency Display Resolution, 164
Frequency for Automatic High-Speed Operation at
Light-Load, 119
Frequency Limit at Position, 123
Frequency Mode #1, 60
Frequency Mode #2, 47, 94
Frequency Override Additive Input, 162
Frequency Override Multiplying Input, 162
Frequency Point Selection, 170
Frequency Reference Source, 42
Frequency Set Mode, 43
Frequency Setting, 47
Frequency Setting Parameters, 50
Fundamental Parameters, 47
Fwd/Rev Disable, 51
G
G7 ASD Control, 26
G7 ASD Spare Parts Listing, 201
G7 Optional Devices, 200
G7 Part Numbering Convention, 182
Gate Array Fault, 177
General Safety Information, 1
Group #1 Speed #1, 146
Group #1 Speed #2, 146
Group #1 Speed #3, 146
210 G7 ASD Operation Manual
Group #1 Speed #4, 146
Group #1 Speed #5, 146
Group #1 Speed #6, 146
Group #1 Speed #7, 146
Group #1 Speed #8, 147
Group #1 Speed Repeat Factor, 146
Group #2 Speed #1, 147
Group #2 Speed #2, 147
Group #2 Speed #3, 147
Group #2 Speed #4, 147
Group #2 Speed #5, 147
Group #2 Speed #6, 147
Group #2 Speed #7, 147
Group #2 Speed #8, 147
Group #2 Speed Repeat Factor, 147
Group #3 Speed #1, 148
Group #3 Speed #2, 148
Group #3 Speed #3, 148
Group #3 Speed #4, 148
Group #3 Speed #5, 148
Group #3 Speed #6, 148
Group #3 Speed #7, 148
Group #3 Speed #8, 148
Group #3 Speed Repeat Factor, 148
Group #4 Speed #1, 149
Group #4 Speed #2, 149
Group #4 Speed #3, 149
Group #4 Speed #4, 149
Group #4 Speed #5, 149
Group #4 Speed #6, 149
Group #4 Speed #7, 149
Group #4 Speed #8, 149
Group #4 Speed Repeat Factor, 148
H
Handling and Storage, 4
Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Acceleration, 118
Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Deceleration, 119
Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Acceleration, 119
Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Deceleration, 119
Hz Per User-defined Unit, 164
I
I/O and Control, 22
I/O Circuit Configurations, 29
ICCDESIGNS, 26
II, 22, 24
Initial Setup, 38
Input Phase Loss, 177
Input Special Functions, 49
Input Terminal Assignment, 49
Input Terminal Delays, 50
Input Terminal Priority, 70
Inrush Current Suppression, 155
Installation and Connections, 17
Installation Notes, 17
Installation Precautions, 4
Integral (I) Gain, 121
Interlock with ST, 155
J
Jog Run Frequency, 107
Jog Settings, 50
Jog Stop Control, 108
Jump Frequencies, 57
Jump Frequency #1, 108
Jump Frequency #1 Bandwidth, 108
Jump Frequency #2, 108
Jump Frequency #2 Bandwidth, 108
Jump Frequency #3, 109
Jump Frequency #3 Bandwidth, 109
Jump Frequency Processing, 109
L
L1/R, 19
L2/S, 19
L3/T, 19
LCD Display, 36
LCD EOI Operation, 42
LCD Port Connection, 55
Lead Length Specifications, 21
LED Option Override Multiplication Gain, 166
Light Load Conditions, 14
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Heavy-Load Detec-
tion Time, 118
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Detection
Time, 118
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Wait Time, 118
Light-load High-speed Operation Selection, 117
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Switching Lower-
Limit Frequency, 117
Line Power Switching, 49, 50
Link Reactor Information, 199
Load Drooping, 177
Load End Short Circuit, 177
Load Inertia (Acc/Dec Torque), 116
Load Sharing Gain Input, 130
Load Torque Filter (Acc/Dec Torque), 116
Load-produced Negative Torque, 15
Local Remote Key, 47
Local|Remote Key, 36
Lockout, 48
G7 ASD Operation Manual 211
LOD Boost Time, 167
LOD Control and Stopping Method, 166
LOD Feedback Level (Hz), 167
LOD Restart Delay Time, 167
LOD Setpoint Boost (Hz), 167
LOD Start Level (Hz), 166
LOD Start Time, 167
Low Current, 177
Low Current Settings, 52
Low Current Trip, 156
Low Current Trip Threshold, 156
Low Current Trip Threshold Time, 156
Low Output Disable, 166
Low Speed Operation, 13
Low Speed Signal Output Frequency, 67
Lower Deviation Limits, 122
Lower Limit Frequency, 40, 64
M
Main Board EEPROM Fault, 177
Manual Torque Limit Settings, 53
maximum Carrier Frequency, 111
Maximum Frequency, 63
Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters, 56
Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency, 94
MOFF, 174
MON/PRG, 37
Monitor Mode, 45
Monitor Setup, 56
MOP acceleration rate, 77
MOP deceleration rate, 77
Motor #1 Base Frequency, 64
Motor #1 Max Output Voltage, 113
Motor #1 Torque Boost, 65
Motor #2 Base Frequency, 85
Motor #2 Max Output Voltage, 86
Motor #2 Torque Boost, 86
Motor #3 Base Frequency, 86
Motor #3 Max Output Voltage, 87
Motor #3 Torque Boost, 87
Motor #4 Base Frequency, 87
Motor #4 Max Output Voltage, 88
Motor #4 Torque Boost, 88
Motor 150% OL Time Limit, 155
Motor Braking, 15
Motor Capacity, 129
Motor Characteristics, 13
Motor connection diagram, 20
Motor Constant 1 (primary resistance), 128
Motor Constant 2 (secondary resistance), 128
Motor Constant 3 (exciting inductance), 128
Motor Constant 3 Enable, 129
Motor Constant 4 (load inertia), 128
Motor Constant 5 (leakage inductance), 128
Motor Counter Data, 124
Motor Current Rating, 41
Motor Overload, 178
Motor Overload Trip, 52
Motor Parameters, 56
Motor Set #1, 47, 56
Motor Set #2, 56
Motor Set #3, 56
Motor Set #4, 56
Motor Settings, 56
Motor Shaft Fixing Control, 106
Motor Shaft Stationary Control, 106
Motor Type, 129
Motor/Load Combinations, 14
Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down, 71
Motorized Pot Settings, 51
Mounting the ASD, 18
MS1 AUX, 17
N
Number of PG Input Pulses, 122
Number of Poles of Motor, 128
Number of Retries, 112
O
OC, 174
OH, 174
OJ, 174
OL Reduction Starting Frequency, 155
OLI, 175
OLM, 175
OLR, 175
ON Input Terminal Assignment, 71
On-Trip Powerline Switching, 120
OP, 175
Operation (Local), 38
Operation Above 60 Hz, 14
Operational and Maintenance Precautions, 8
Option Fault, 178
Option Type, 46
Options, 200
OT, 175
OUT1, 22, 24
OUT1 Off Delay, 84
OUT1 On Delay, 83
Out1 Out2 FL, 45
OUT1 Output Terminal Assignment, 79
OUT2, 22, 24
212 G7 ASD Operation Manual
OUT2 Off Delay, 84
OUT2 On Delay, 83
OUT2 Output Terminal Assignment, 79
OUT4 Off Delay, 85
OUT4 On Delay, 83
OUT5 Off Delay, 85
OUT5 On Delay, 83
OUT6 Off Delay, 85
OUT6 On Delay, 84
OUT7 Off Delay, 85
OUT7 On Delay, 84
Output #4 Terminal Assignment, 79
Output #5 Terminal Assignment, 80
Output #6 Terminal Assignment, 80
Output #7 Terminal Assignment, 80
Output Current Protection Fault, 178
Output Phase Loss, 178
Output Phase Loss Detection, 155
Output Terminal Assignments, 81
Output Terminal Delays, 50
Output Terminal Functions, 49
Output terminal selections, 61
Over Exciting Cooperation, 138
Over Speed, 179
Overcurrent During Acceleration, 178
Overcurrent During Deceleration, 178
Overcurrent During Run, 178
Over-current Protection, 16
Overcurrent Stall Level, 154
Overheat, 179
Overload, 52
Overload Protection, 13
Override Control, 54
Overspeed Detection Frequency Range, 158
Overtorque, 179
Overtorque Detection Time, 157
Overtorque Settings, 52
Overtorque Trip, 157
Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level (Negative Torque), 157
Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level (Positive Torque), 157
Overvoltage During Acceleration, 179
Overvoltage During Deceleration, 179
Overvoltage During Run, 179
Over-voltage Stall, 113
Overvoltage Stall Level, 159
Overvoltage Stall Level (fast), 158
P
P24, 22, 24
PA, 20, 112
Panel Menu, 44
Parity, 168
Pattern #1 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 149
Pattern #10 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern #11 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern #12 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 151
Pattern #13 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 151
Pattern #14 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 151
Pattern #15 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 151
Pattern #2 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern #3 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern #4 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern #5 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern #6 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern #7 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern #8 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern #9 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 150
Pattern Run, 54, 145
Pattern Run #1 Run-Time Setting, 151
Pattern Run #10 Run-Time Setting, 152
Pattern Run #11 Run-Time Setting, 153
Pattern Run #12 Run-Time Setting, 153
Pattern Run #13 Run-Time Setting, 153
Pattern Run #14 Run-Time Setting, 153
Pattern Run #15 Run-Time Setting, 153
Pattern Run #2 Continuation Mode Run-Time Setting,
151
Pattern Run #3 Run-Time Setting, 151
Pattern Run #4 Run-Time Setting, 151
Pattern Run #5 Run-Time Setting, 152
Pattern Run #6 Run-Time Setting, 152
Pattern Run #7 Run-Time Setting, 152
Pattern Run #8 Run-Time Setting, 152
Pattern Run #9 Run-Time Setting, 152
Pattern Run Control Parameters, 54
Pattern Run Description, 145
Pattern Run Setup, 145
PB, 112
PG Disconnect Detection, 122
PG Input Phases, 122
PG Settings, 53
PG Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 103
PG Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency), 104
PG Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 104
PG Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency), 104
PG Type/Connection Error, 179
Phantom Fault, 179
Phase Loss, 52
phase-shifting transformer, 20
PID feedback, 121, 166
PO, 20
POFF, 175
Position Completion Range, 123
Position Deviation Error, 179
Position Difference Limit (Droop Pulses Allowed), 160
Position Loop Gain, 123
G7 ASD Operation Manual 213
Power Connections, 19
Power Factor Correction, 14
Power Running Torque Limit #1, 133
PP, 22, 24
Preferences, 47
Preset Speed #1, 66
Preset Speed #10, 110
Preset Speed #11, 110
Preset Speed #12, 110
Preset Speed #13, 110
Preset Speed #14, 110
Preset Speed #15, 110
Preset Speed #2, 66
Preset Speed #3, 67
Preset Speed #4, 67
Preset Speed #5, 67
Preset Speed #6, 67
Preset Speed #7, 67
Preset Speed #8, 109
Preset Speed #9, 109
Preset Speed Direction #1, 125
Preset Speed Direction #10, 126
Preset Speed Direction #11, 126
Preset Speed Direction #12, 127
Preset Speed Direction #13, 127
Preset Speed Direction #14, 127
Preset Speed Direction #15, 127
Preset Speed Direction #2, 125
Preset Speed Direction #3, 125
Preset Speed Direction #4, 125
Preset Speed Direction #5, 125
Preset Speed Direction #6, 126
Preset Speed Direction #7, 126
Preset Speed Direction #8, 126
Preset Speed Direction #9, 126
Preset Speed Mode, 51, 54
Preset Speeds, 50, 54
Program Menu Navigation, 47
Program Mode, 47
Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform
Initialization, 165
Proportional (P) Gain, 121
Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID), 121
Protection Parameters, 51, 52
PtSt, 175
Pulse Width Modulation, 13
PWM Carrier Frequency, 111
Q
Qualified Personnel, 3
R
R, 22, 23
R Input Terminal Assignment, 71
R Input Terminal Delay, 82
R/F Priority Selection, 69
RAM Fault, 179
Reach Settings, 49
Real Time Clock, 200
Realtime Clock Setup, 47
Reference Priority Selection, 91
Regeneration Torque Limit #1, 133
Regeneration Torque Limit #2, 134
Regeneration Torque Limit #3, 134
Regeneration Torque Limit #4, 134
Regeneration Torque Limit Setting #1, 133
Release After Run Timer (brake), 160
Remote EOI Required Hardware, 190
RES, 22, 23
RES Input Terminal Assignment, 72
RES Input Terminal Delay, 82
Reset, 62
Retry/Restart Configuration, 51
Reverse Speed Limit Input, 131
Reverse Speed Limit Level, 131
Review Startup Screen, 48
Ridethrough Mode, 112
ROM Fault, 179
Root menu mapping, 43
Root Menus, 43
Rotary Encoder, 37
RR, 22, 23
RR Bias Adjust, 136
RR Gain Adjust, 136
RR Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 95
RR Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency), 95
RR Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 96
RR Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency), 96
RR Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 96
RR Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 96
RS232, 26
RS232/RS485 Baud Rate, 171
RS232/RS485 Communications Time Out Time, 168
RS232/RS485 Communications Time-Out Action, 169
RS232/RS485 Master Output, 172
RS232/RS485 Response Delay Time, 172
RS232/RS485 Wire Count, 172
RS485, 26
Run Frequency, 104
Run Frequency Hysteresis, 105
Run Key, 36
RX, 22, 23
RX Bias Adjust, 136
RX Gain Adjust, 137
214 G7 ASD Operation Manual
RX Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 97
RX Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency), 97
RX Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 98
RX Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency), 98
RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 98
RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 98
RX2 Bias Adjust, 137
RX2 Gain Adjust, 137
RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 99
RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency), 99
RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 100
RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency), 100
RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 100
RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 100
S
S1, 22, 23
S1 – S4 Input Terminal Delay, 82
S1 Input Terminal Assignment, 72
S2, 22, 23
S2 Input Terminal Assignment, 72
S3, 22, 23
S3 Input Terminal Assignment, 72
S4, 22, 23
S4 Input Terminal Assignment, 73
S5 – S16 Input Terminal Delay, 82
S5 Input Terminal Assignment, 73
S6 Input Terminal Assignment, 73
S7 Input Terminal Assignment, 74
Scrolling Monitor, 43
Scrolling Monitor Select, 57
Service Life Information, 9
Shipping Weight, 182
Shipping Weight (lbs.), 182
Short Circuit Detect Pulse, 52
Short Circuit Test, 156
Short Circuit Test Duration, 156
Sink/Source Setting Error, 179
Soft Stall, 65
Soft Stall Enable, 52
Soft Start, 52
Spare Parts Listing, 201
S-pattern 1, 141
S-pattern 2, 141
S-Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment, 142
S-Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment, 142
Special Control Parameters, 57, 58
Special Parameters, 58
Speed at Drooping Gain 0%, 116
Speed at Drooping Gain 100%, 116
Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range, 158
Speed Limit (torque) Reference, 132
Speed Limit Torque Level, 132
Speed Limit Torque Range, 132
Speed Limit Torque Recovery, 132
Speed Loop Integral Gain, 124
Speed Loop Parameter Ratio, 124
Speed Loop Proportional Gain, 124
Speed Reach Frequency, 68
Speed Reach Frequency Tolerance, 68
Speed Ref. Setpoint, 50
Speeds, 54
splash screen display, 27
ST, 22, 23
ST Input Terminal Assignment, 72
ST Input Terminal Delay, 82
ST Signal Selection, 69
ST1, 17
Stall, 51
Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone, 138
Stall Prevention During Regeneration, 135
Standard Mode Settings, 47
Startup and Test, 21
Startup Frequency, 104
Startup Wizard, 47
Startup Wizard Requirements, 40
Status LED, 36
Stop Key, 36
Stop Pattern, 165
SW1, 25
SW2, 25
Switching Frequency of Current/Voltage Control, 139
Switching Load Torque During Forward-Run, 118
Switching Load Torque During Reverse-Run, 119
Synchronized Torque Bias Input, 130
System Grounding, 19
System Integration Precautions, 7
System Operation, 38
T
T1/U, 19
T2/V, 19
T3/W, 19
Tension, 130
Tension Torque Bias Input, 130
Terminal Descriptions, 23
Terminal Selection Parameters, 49
Torque Boost Adjustment, 162
Torque Command, 129
Torque Command Filter, 129
Torque Command Mode, 132
Torque Control, 52, 53
Torque Limit Group, 166
Torque Limit Mode, 134
G7 ASD Operation Manual 215
Torque Limit Mode (Speed Dependent), 135
Torque Limit Settings, 53
Torque Proving Fault, 179
Torque Setting Parameters, 52, 53
Torque Speed Limiting, 53
Trip History, 56, 180
Trip Monitor From ASD, 181
Trip Monitor from ASD, 56, 57
Trip Record at Monitor Screen, 181
Trip Save at Power Down Enable, 154
Trip Settings, 52
Trips, 173
Trouble Shooting, 173
TTL Master Output, 169
Type Reset, 48, 62
Typeform Error, 180
U
U Phase Short Circuit, 180
UC, 175
UL 1995, 182
Undervoltage Detection Time, 159
Undervoltage Stall level, 159
Undervoltage Trip, 159
Undervoltage/Ridethrough, 52
Up Key, 36
Upper Deviation Limits, 122
Upper Limit Frequency, 40, 63
Upper Limit Frequency Adjustment, 161
Use Speed Mode, 125
User Notification Codes, 176
User Notification codes, 173
Using Vector Control, 16
Utility Parameters, 48
V
V Phase Short Circuit, 180
V/f Adjustment, 58
V/f Adjustment Coefficient, 88
V/f Five Point Setting, 58
V/f Group, 165
V/f Pattern, 64
Vector Motor Model, 56
Vector Motor Model Autotune Command, 127
Vector Motor Model Slip Frequency Gain, 127
Versions, 48
VI, 22, 24
VI/II Bias Adjust, 135
VI/II Gain Adjust, 136
VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 92
VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #1 (frequency), 92
VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 93
VI/II Speed Reference Setpoint #2 (frequency), 93
VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (%), 93
VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (%), 93
Viewing Trip Information, 180
Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor, 40
Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time, 139
Voltage Vector Control, 138
Volts per Hertz Setting, 41
W
W Phase Short Circuit, 180
Warranty Card, 3
Wizard Finish, 42

Navigation menu